TW200835882A - Power control device - Google Patents

Power control device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW200835882A
TW200835882A TW096149439A TW96149439A TW200835882A TW 200835882 A TW200835882 A TW 200835882A TW 096149439 A TW096149439 A TW 096149439A TW 96149439 A TW96149439 A TW 96149439A TW 200835882 A TW200835882 A TW 200835882A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
control
power signal
signal
power
period
Prior art date
Application number
TW096149439A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI435995B (en
Inventor
Sehat Sutardja
Original Assignee
Marvell World Trade Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Marvell World Trade Ltd filed Critical Marvell World Trade Ltd
Publication of TW200835882A publication Critical patent/TW200835882A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI435995B publication Critical patent/TWI435995B/en

Links

Classifications

    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02BCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES RELATED TO BUILDINGS, e.g. HOUSING, HOUSE APPLIANCES OR RELATED END-USER APPLICATIONS
    • Y02B20/00Energy efficient lighting technologies, e.g. halogen lamps or gas discharge lamps

Landscapes

  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)

Abstract

A controllable light bulb comprises an electrical connector, a receiver module, an electronic switch, a translucent casing, and a light producing element. The electrical connector receives a power signal. The receiver module is powered by the power signal received via the electrical connector and determines control parameters based upon on/off modulation of the power signal. The receive module generates a control signal based upon the control parameters while the power signal is on. The electronic switch putputs an output power signal and reduces the output power signal based on the control signal. The translucent casing encloses the light producing element. The light producing element receives the output power signal.

Description

200835882 九、發明說明: 【發明所屬技術領域】 本發明涉及照明系統,以及更尤其涉及控制照明系統。 【先前技術】 在此所提供之背景說明之目的為一般性地介紹本發明之内容。本案發 明人的操作、至此背景技術部分中所說明之程度,以及在本案提出申請時 無法以其他方式合適作為習知技術之說明觀點,並非明示或暗示地被認為 是本發明之習知技術。200835882 IX. INSTRUCTIONS: FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates to lighting systems, and more particularly to controlling lighting systems. [Prior Art] The background description provided herein is for the purpose of general description of the present invention. The mere exemplification of the present invention, the extent to which it is described in the background section, and the description of the prior art in this application, are not to be construed as a

現在參考第1圖,描述了照明系統的功能方塊圖。服務面板1〇2與開 關104相連。開關104與燈具1〇6相連。燈泡1〇8與燈具1〇6相連。^關 104選擇性地允許來自服務面板102的電流經由燈具流過燈泡應。為 了開與關燈泡108,必須致動開關1〇4。 為了允許遙控燈泡舰,關104可以被替換為電力線載體開關。燈泡 可以然後被本地以及遠端地開與關,諸如藉由整個房間燈光關閉命令。 然,,取代開關1G4涉及處理正常負載全線路電壓的線路。許多房屋主需 要請電工來更換關綱,此為昂貴的過程。此外,新的開騎型式必須= 配先W的開關104,或還需要購買並安裝新的牆板。 、Referring now to Figure 1, a functional block diagram of a lighting system is depicted. The service panel 1〇2 is connected to the switch 104. The switch 104 is connected to the lamp 1〇6. The bulb 1〇8 is connected to the lamp 1〇6. The off 104 selectively allows current from the service panel 102 to flow through the bulb via the fixture. In order to turn the bulb 108 on and off, the switch 1〇4 must be actuated. In order to allow remote control of the light bulb, the switch 104 can be replaced with a power line carrier switch. The light bulb can then be turned on and off locally and remotely, such as by the entire room light off command. However, instead of the switch 1G4, a line that handles the normal line full line voltage is involved. Many homeowners need an electrician to replace the gate, which is an expensive process. In addition, the new open-mount version must be = with the switch 104 of the first W, or you need to purchase and install a new wall panel. ,

【發明内容】 的Μ二種泡包括:電性連接器、接㈣模組、電子開關、半透明 件。電錢綠触轉錄。触11歡藉由經 ΐΐΐίζ Z 電,並且根據功率信_接^切__ 萝子在辨信號接鱗,根據控制參數産生控制信 =出功2域。·半透a績體包住所述敍生元 接收所述輸出功率信號。 丨卞所述尤座玍兀仵 在其他特徵中,所述接通/切斷調變包括在預定時間期間上對於 5 200835882 功率信號存在和辨信號不存在之—的魏。魏接通/切_變包括 期的取樣綱收集的二進位·,其t,第一二進錄麟應於功率信號 存在’第二二進位狀態對應於功率信號不存在。所述接通/切斷調變包^由" 功率信號存在和功率信號不存在之一的期間決定的二進位資料,其中,第 -二進位狀態對應於比預定長度短的細,第二二進錄態對應ς比 預定長度長的期間。 、 在其他特徵中,所述接收器模組在所述接通/切斷調變指示程式規劃啓 動序列後決定職控制參數。所絲核解動相包括在歡時間^ 内執行的預錢通/切斷序列。當接收到所述控制信號時,所述電子開關將 所述輸出功率“號縮減到大約〇。當接收到控制信號時,所述電子開關將所 述輸出功率彳§號縮減到調降值。所述調降值小於所述功率信號。 在還有其他特徵中,所述接收器模組包括電力線載體接收器模纟且,盆 經由所述神賤接收資料,與第—位址有關,並域受定址所述第一 ς 址和整體位址之一的命令。所述控制參數包括所述第一位址,所述接收器 模組根據所述龍來纽所雜偷號。所述電力賴體接收器模組根據 所述接通/切斷調變而執行操作。所述操作是重設位址操作、更新位址操作、 廣播連接操作、以及傳送位址操作的至少一個。 在其他特徵中,所述接收器模組更包括計時模組,其在接收到所述功 率信號後開始計數。所述控制參數包括預定值。當所述計時模組達到所述 預定值時,所述接收器模組産生所述控制信號。在啓動程式規劃模式後, 所述接收斋模組根據功率信號接通的期間來設定所述預定值。當在所述計 時器模組達到所述預定值之前,所述功率信號被切斷時,所述接收器模組 縮減所述預定值。 在其他特徵中,當在所述計時器模組達到所述預定值後的預定時間期 間中,所述功率信號被切斷然後接通時,所述接收器模組增加預定值。在 所述计時斋模組達到所述預定值之前,當所述功率信號在預定時間期間内 切斷、接通和切斷時,所述接收器模組縮減所述預定值。當在所述計時器 模組達到所述預定值之後的預定時間期間内,所述功率信號切斷、接通、 200835882 切斷和接柄’所述接收n模組增加所麵定值。所述電性連接哭包 電陽螺紋和導電尖端。所述光產生元件包括金屬燈絲。 ro 、 在燈_触神雜;監控所述神錢的接通/切 斷调k,根據所述接通/切斷調變而決定控制參數,·在所述功率信夢 ,,所述控制參數而産生控制信號;向所述燈泡的光產生元件提“輸出功 率仏號,並且,根據所述控制信號而縮減所述輪出功率信號。 在其他特财,所舰控包括··在預定時間觸上對功率信號存在和 功=遽不存在之-進行計數。所述監控包括以週_取樣_收集二進 位貧料,,其令,帛-二進位狀態對應於功率信號存在,第二二進位狀態對 $於功率信號不存在。所述監控包括藉由測量功率信號存在和功率信號不 j之—的_來錄m料,其中,第―二進錄騎應於比預定 長度短的_,第二三進錄態對應於崎顧定長度·_。、 在其他特财,所財歧包括:在執摘賴定之所述接通/切 _變_程式規劃啓動序列。所述程式規劃猶序列包括在預定時間期 間内伽的預定紐/峨序列。所麵減包括當減到所述控制信號時, 將所述輸出功率信號縮減到調降值和切斷值之一。所述方法更包括:接收 在所述功率信壯重疊_料;騎述資贿碼為複數個命令;選擇所述 命^中疋址第-紐和整體位址之_的命令,其中,所述控制參數包括所 述第一位址;以及根據所述所選擇的命令來産生所述控制信號。 在c有/、他知'徵中,所述方法更包括·根據所述接通/切斷調變,以執 機力線載體操作。所述操作是重設位址操作、更新位址操作、廣播連接 操以及傳送位址操作的至少—個。所述方法更包括:在接收到所述功 率信號後’對第-躺進行計時。所述鋪參數包括所述第—期間。當 所述第過去時,騎所魅生所述控繼號_作。所述方法更包 括:在啓動程式規劃模式後,根據所述功率信號接通的期間來設定所述第 一期間。 在其他特徵中’所述方法更包括:當在所述第一期間過去之前,切斷 所述功率信號時’縮減所述第-_。所述方法更包括··當在所述第-期 7 200835882 間過去後的預定時間期間内,所述功率信號被切斷然後接通時,增加所述 第一期間。所述方法更包括··在所述第一期間過去之前,當所述功率信號 在預定時間期間内切斷、接通和切斷時,縮減所述第一期間。所述方法更 ,括··當在已經執行了所述縮減之後的預定時間期間内,所述功率信號切 斷、接通、切斷和接通時,增加所述第一期間。 種可控制燈泡包括:電連接裝置,用於接收功率信號;接收裝置, 用於根據所述功率信號的接通/切斷調變而決定控制參數,並且用於當所述 功率信號接通時,根據所述控制參數來産生控制信號,其中,所述接收裝 置藉由經由所述電連接裝置接收的所述功率信號供電;電子開關裝置,用 =將輸出功率信號輸出,並且用於根據所述控制信號而縮減所述輸出功率 ^唬,光産生裝置,用於接收所述輸出功率信號,並且用於產生光;以及, 半透明殼體,用於包住所述光産生裝置。 在其他特徵中,所述接通/切斷調變包括在預定時間期間上對於功率信 號存在和功率信號不存在之一的計數。所述接通/切斷調變包括在週期的取 ,期間收集的二進位資料,其中,第—二進位狀態對應於功率信號存在, 第二二進位狀態對應於功率信號不存在。所述接通/切斷調變包括由功率信 號存在和功率信號不存在之一的期間決定的二進位資料,其中,第一二進 位狀恶對應於比預定長度短的期間,第二二進位狀態對應於比所述預定長 度長的期間。 在其他特徵中,所述接收裝置在所述接通/切斷調變指示程式規劃啓動 序後決疋所述控制參數。所述程式規劃啓動序列包括在預定時間期間内 執灯的預定接通/切斷序列。當接收騎述測信餅,所述電子開關裝置 將輸出功率5虎縮減到大約0。當接收到控制信號時,所述電子開關裝置將 輸出功率信號縮減到調降值。所述調降值小於所述功率信號。 在其他特徵中,所述接收裝置包括電力線載體接收裝置,㈣經由所 述功率信號_收資料,並賴於接受定址第—位址和整體位址之一的命 令。、所述^制參數包括所述第—位址,所賴收裝置祕所述資料來産生 所述控制^旒。所述電力線載體接收裝置根據所述接通八刀斷調變而執行操 200835882 作 定值 在其他特徵中’所述操作是重設位址操作、更新位址操作、廣播連接 操作、以及傳送位址操作的至少-個。所述接收裝置更包括計時裝置,用 於在接收到所述功率信號之後進行計數。所述鋪參數包括預定^所述 接收裝置在當所述計時裝置_所述預定辦,産生所述控號。所述 ,收裝置在程式規賴式啓動之後’根據功率信雜通的綱蚊所述預 在其他特徵中,當在計時模組達到所述預^值之前,所述功率信號被 切斷時’所述接收裝置縮減所述預定值。當在所述計時模組達到所述預定 值後的預定時間期間内’所述功率信號被切斷然後接通時,所述接置 增加=述預定值。當在所述計時模組達到所述預定值之前,所述功率信號 =預定時間_ _斷、接通和切斷時’所述接收裝置縮減所述預定值。 虽在所述計時裝置達到所述預定值之後的預定時間期間内,所述功率作號 切斷、接通、切斷和接通時,所述接收裝置增加所述預定值。 ° :種1_燈賴整H包括H性連接器、接收賴組 連接器。所述第—電性連接器從燈具接收功率信號。所述接 ^核顯她由第-電性連接器接㈣功率信號供電,根據功幹號的 並且#㈣轉健接稱,減所“ i二姑二控制錢。所述電子開關將輸出功率信號輸出,並 :、,1制信號而縮減所述輸出功率信號。所述第二電性連接器容納 燈心,亚且向所述燈泡提供所述輸出功率信號。 仲舰巾,所雜通_纖包括··在歡__上對於功率 期間虎不存的計數。所述接通/切斷調變包括:在週期 在,第二二谁::進位貝料,其中,第—二進位狀態對應於功率信號存 ..^77 狀悲對應於辨信號不存在。所述接通/切斷輕包括··由 裤域存在和功率信號不存在之一的期間決定的二進位資料,宜中,= ^權观於比所述 9 200835882 在其他特徵中,所述接收器模組在所述接通/切斷調變指示程式規劃啓 動序列^定,㈣參數。所雜絲瓣轉顺括··在就時間期 門内,行的預疋接勒靖序列。當接收到所述控說時,所述電子開關 將戶斤述輪㈣狗遺縮減到大約G。當接收到控制信號時,所述電子開關將 所述輸出功率信號縮減觸降值。所賴降值小賊述功率信號。 、在八他4寸徵中,所述接收器模組包括電力線載體接收器模組,其經由 ^功率域接收I料,與第—位址有關,並且接受定址所述第-位址和 整體位址的命令。所述控制參數包括所述第-位址,所述接收器模組 戶胃料來産生所述湖健。所述電力賴體接收11模組根據所述 ^刀,調變而執行操作。所述操作是重設位址操作、更新位址操作、廣 播連接操作和傳送位址操作的至少一個。 ’、八 率广’所述接收器模組更包括計時模組,其在接收到所述功 箱二^絲捕。所雜制參數包翻定值。#所料雜_到所述 ’所述接收器模組產生所述控制信號。在啓動程式規則模式後, j組根據轉信號接__來設定所賴定值。當在所述計 職讀,所轉纖墙時,峨收器模組 門中在L當在所述計時器模組達到所述預定值後的預定時間期 時器模組達到所述預枝之前,所述功率信號在預定時間=二 ===預定值之後的預定時間期間内,所述功率信號 電陽螺紋和導電尖端。第二紐連接器包料電陰職和導_接1 誉:紐具接收神錄;碰所述神信號的接通/切斷 调k ’根據所賴馳;_變聽紐 趣概地繼可_==: 根據所述控制#號而縮減所述可開關功率信號。 200835882 在其他特徵中,所述監控包括:在預定時間期間上對功率信號存在和 功率彳§號不存在之一進行計數。所述監控包括以週期的取樣期間收集二進 位資料,其申,第一二進位狀態對應於功率信號存在,第二二進位狀態對 應於功率信號不存在。所述監控包括藉由測量功率信號存在和功率信號不 存在之一的期間來收集二進位資料,其中,第一二進位狀態對應於比預定 長度短的期間,第二二進位狀態對應於比所述預定長度長的期間。 在其他特徵中,所述方法更包括:在執行所述決定之前從所述接通/切 斷調變偵測程式規劃啓動序列。所述程式規劃啓動序列包括在預定時間期 間内偵測的預定接通/切斷序列。所述縮減包括當接收到所述控制信號時, 將所述輸出功率信號縮減到調降值和切斷值之一。 在八他特徵中,所述方法更包括:接收在所述功率信號上重疊的資料; 將=述資料解碼為複數個命令;選擇所述命令中定址第一位址和整體位址 之的々,其中,所述控制參數包括所述第一位址;並且,根據所述所 命令綠細賴制錄。舰絲更包括··娜職魏/切斷調 «執行電力線髓操作。所述操作是重齡址操作、更新位址操作、廣 播連接操作和傳送位址操作的至少一個。 /、 -徵巾’所述綠更包括:在接㈣所述功率信驗開始對第 拉二-订计時。所述控制參數包括所述第一期間。當所述第一期間過去 叫模^所ίί生所龍繼號的操作。所述方法更包括:在啓動程式規 ίΐί ^述辨信號接通的_來設定所述第―_。所述方法 -ί間/在所述第—期間過去之前’切斷所述功率信號時,縮減所述第 間期^包括:#在舰第—綱過錢的預定時 法更包括:在所述^=然後接通時=所述第-期間。所述方 接通時,增加所間期間内’所述功率信號切斷、接通、切斷和 200835882 一種可控制燈泡調整器包括:第一電遠 ^ ,-t 接收裝置’用於根據所述功样^接、收功率信號; 賴接通麟機而蚊_參數,並且 制參數來產生控制魏,其中,所 肖她崎料—電連縣4接_騎功率信魏電;電子 ==辨信號輸出,並且用於根據所述控制信號而縮減 1礼#°,弟—電連接裝置,容納燈泡,並且向所述燈 泡提供可開關功率信號。 Π度 f其他舰中’所述接通/切_變包括在預定時間腦上對於功率信 ΪΓ子ΓΓ健特在之—的計數。所雜通/切_魏括在週期的取 ^間H進位貧料,其中,第—二進位狀態對應於神信號存在, f進錄_應於裤信财存心所賴勒爾調魏括由功率信 號存在和功率信號不存在之—的躺決定的二進位資料,其中,第一二進 =狀態對應於_定長度__ ’第二二進錄_應於崎 度長的期間。 在其他特徵t ’所述接錄置麵雜通/切斷觀指示喊賴啓動 ^列後決定所述控制參數。所述程式關啓動序列包括在預定時間期間内 行的預疋接通/切斷序列。當接收到所述控制信號時,所述電子開關裝置 將輸出功率城縮減到大約0。當接收到控制信號時,所述電子開關裝置將 輸出功率信號縮減到調降值。所述珊值小於所述功率信號。 、、在其他特徵中,所述接收裝置包括電力線載體接收裝置,用於經由所 述功率《而接收資料’並刻於接受定址第—位址和整體位址之一的命 7、。、所述控制參數包括所述第一位址,所述接收裝置根據所述資料來産生 所述控制城。所魏力線載體触裝錄據職接通/_調變而執行操 作。所述操作是重設位址操作、更新位址操作、廣播連接操作和傳送位址 操作的至少一個。 ^在其他特徵令’所述接收裝置更包括計時裝置,用於在接收到所述功 率信號後計數。所述控制參數包括預定值。當所述計時模組達到所述預定 值時,所述接收裝置産生所述控制信號。在啓動程式規劃模式後,所述接 12 200835882 收裝置根據所述功率信號接通的期間來設定所述預定值。當在所述計時模 組達到所述預定值之前所述功率信號被切斷時,所述接收裝置縮=所述預 定值。 在其他特徵中,當在所述計時模組達到所述預定值後的預定時間期間 内,所述功率信號被切斷然後接通時,所述接收裝置增加所述預定值^丄 所迷計時模組達刺賴定值之前,#所述辨信號在預定時购間内切 斷、接通和切斷時,所述接收逆境縮減所述預定值。當在所述模纟且穿置達 到所述預定值之後的預定時__,所述功率信號切斷、接通、崎 接通時,所述接收裝置增加所述預定值。 一種可控繼具包括第-電性連接H、接收賴組、電子關和 U連接器。所述第-電性連舖純功率健。所雜收賴組藉由經 ^-電性連接器接㈣裤信號供電,根據功率信韻接通/切斷調變而 ^定控制參數’並且當職轉信_稱姆__錄而選擇性地 ^生控制信號。所述電子開_輸出功率信號輸出,並且根據所述控制作 t縮減所述輸出功率信號。所述第二電性連接器容納燈泡,並且‘ 燈泡提供所述輸出功率信號。^ 在其他職巾’賴接糖_機包括在預定時間綱上對於功率作 健不ΐ在之_的計數。所述接通/切_ 括在週期“ 繁Β⑺的—進位貝料,其中,第—二進位狀態對應㈣率信號存在, 進位狀態對應於功率信號不存在。所述接義^賴包括由功率信 率信號不存在之—軸間蚊的二進位資料,其中,第一二進 =於比就長度短的期間,第二二進位狀態對應於比所述預定長 動;财’所錢物驗在所述接通/切_變指示程式規劃啓 内執达控參數。所述程式規劃啓動序列包括在預定時間期間 所述^屮=通切斷序列。當接收到所述控制信號時,所述電子開關將 it t Γ1減到大約G。當接㈣控制信號時,所述電子開關將所 絲出功率信雜_調降值1述調降值祕所述功率信號。 13 200835882 在還有其他特徵中,所述接收器模組包括電力線載體接收器模組,其 t由所述功率彳a號接收資料,與第—位址有關,並且接受定址所述第一位 =和整體位址的命令。所述鋪參數包括所述第—位址,所述接收器 模組根據所述f料來纽職控備號。所述電力賴體触器模組根據 所述接通/切斷調變而執行操作。所述操#是重設位址操作、麟位址操作、 廣播連接彳呆作和傳送位址操作的至少一個。 二在其他特徵巾,所述接收II她更包括計時輸,其在接收到所述功 率信號後開始計數。所述控制參數包括預定值。#所述計時模組達到所述 預疋值時’所述接收减組産生所述控制信號。在啓動程式規劃模式後, 所述接收賴峰據轉錢接__來蚊所麵线。#在所述計 時器模組達到所顧定值之前,所述功率信麵靖時,所述接收 縮減所述預定值。 w 在其雜徵巾,#搞料時賴組達騎述預定錄的預定時間期 間内,所述功率信號被切斷然後接通時,所述接㈣模組增加預定值。备 在,述計時難__述職值之前,所述轉健麵定時間期^ 切蚜、接通和切斷時’所述接收器模組縮減所述預定值。當在所述計時哭 莫,達到所述縣值之後的預定時__,所述功率信號靖、接通: 纖曝所峨值。職概接器包括導 斯補ΐϊϋ德具處触辨錢;錄辨信號的接礮切 觀喊输够數;在轉信號接通時, =所述控够數_生鮮賊;_缺供可簡辨魏;並且, 根據所述控制#號而縮減所述可開關功率信號。 功率’所輕她括:麵^___钱存在和 位ίϊΐίΓ進行計數。所述監控包括以聊的取樣期間收集二進 :貝科’其中,弟—二進位狀騎胁功率信號存在,第二二進 率信號不餘。所碰控包簡_量辨信縣麵辨^不 存在之-_絲《二雜紐,其中,第―二齡雜對應於賴 200835882 長度=期1,第二二進位狀態對應於比所述預定長度長的期間。 斷調二中戶斤述方法更包括:在執行所述決定之前從所述接通/切 ί規劃啓動序列。所述程式規劃啓動序列包括在預定時間期 將所二接通/切斷序列。所述縮減包括當接收到所述控制信號時,SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Two types of bubbles include: an electrical connector, a (four) module, an electronic switch, and a translucent member. Electricity money green touch transcription. Touch 11 is powered by ΐΐΐίζ Z, and according to the power signal _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ A semi-transparent a-body surrounds the descriptor to receive the output power signal. In other features, the on/off modulation includes a Wei that does not exist for the power signal of the 5 200835882 during a predetermined time period. Wei is switched on/cut to change the binary of the sampling sequence included in the period, and t, the first binary input should be in the presence of the power signal. The second binary state corresponds to the absence of the power signal. The on/off modulation packet is a binary data determined by a period in which a power signal exists and one of the power signals does not exist, wherein the second binary state corresponds to a thinner than a predetermined length, and the second The binary recording state corresponds to a period longer than a predetermined length. In other features, the receiver module determines a job control parameter after the on/off modulation indicator program is programmed to initiate a sequence. The silk core dissociation phase includes a pre-money pass/cut sequence executed within the time of the game. The electronic switch reduces the output power "number" to about 〇 when the control signal is received. When the control signal is received, the electronic switch reduces the output power 彳§ to a down-regulation value. The downmodulation value is less than the power signal. In still other features, the receiver module includes a power line carrier receiver module, and the basin receives data via the god, related to the first address, and The domain is commanded to address one of the first address and the overall address. The control parameter includes the first address, and the receiver module is based on the nickname of the dragon. The on-body receiver module performs an operation according to the on/off modulation. The operation is at least one of a reset address operation, an update address operation, a broadcast connection operation, and a transfer address operation. In the feature, the receiver module further includes a timing module that starts counting after receiving the power signal. The control parameter includes a predetermined value. When the timing module reaches the predetermined value, the Receiver module production The control signal, after the program planning mode is started, the receiving module sets the predetermined value according to a period during which the power signal is turned on. When the timer module reaches the predetermined value, the power The receiver module reduces the predetermined value when the signal is cut. In other features, the power signal is cut off during a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value And then, when turned on, the receiver module increases a predetermined value. When the timing signal reaches the predetermined value, when the power signal is turned off, on, and off within a predetermined time period, The receiver module reduces the predetermined value. When a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value, the power signal is cut off, turned on, and the 200835882 is cut off and the handle is The receiving n module increases the surface value. The electrical connection connects the electric male thread and the conductive tip. The light generating element comprises a metal filament. ro, in the light _ touching the miscellaneous; monitoring the god money connection Pass/cut off k, according to Turning on/off the modulation to determine the control parameter, generating a control signal in the power signal, the control parameter; providing an output power nickname to the light generating component of the bulb, and according to the The control signal reduces the round-robin power signal. In other special wealth, the ship control includes: · At the predetermined time, it is counted on the presence of the power signal and the power = 遽 does not exist. The monitoring includes collecting the binary inferior material by the cycle_sampling_, which causes the 帛-binary state to correspond to the presence of the power signal and the second binary state to the power signal not present. The monitoring includes recording the m material by measuring the presence of the power signal and the power signal, wherein the second binary recording should be shorter than the predetermined length, and the second three-inward recording corresponds to the Guding length·_. In other special wealth, the financial disparity includes: in the execution of the on/off _ change _ program planning start sequence. The program plan sequence includes a predetermined sequence of 纽/峨 within a predetermined time period. The subtraction includes reducing the output power signal to one of a down-conversion value and a cut-off value when the control signal is reduced. The method further includes: receiving an overlap in the power signal; riding the bribe code as a plurality of commands; selecting a command of the first and second addresses of the fate and the address of the whole address, wherein The control parameter includes the first address; and the control signal is generated according to the selected command. In the case of c having /, he knows, the method further includes operating the line carrier according to the on/off modulation. The operations are at least one of reset address operation, update address operation, broadcast connection operation, and transfer address operation. The method further includes: timing the first lying after receiving the power signal. The paving parameter includes the first period. When the first time passes, the rider charms the control number. The method further includes setting the first period based on a period during which the power signal is turned on after starting the program planning mode. In other features, the method further includes: reducing the first -_ when the power signal is turned off before the first period elapses. The method further includes increasing the first period when the power signal is turned off and then turned on during a predetermined time period after the elapse of the period - 200835882. The method further includes reducing the first period when the power signal is turned off, on, and off during a predetermined time period before the first period elapses. The method further includes increasing the first period when the power signal is cut, turned on, turned off, and turned on within a predetermined time period after the reduction has been performed. The controllable light bulb comprises: an electrical connection device for receiving a power signal; a receiving device for determining a control parameter according to the on/off modulation of the power signal, and for when the power signal is turned on Generating a control signal according to the control parameter, wherein the receiving device is powered by the power signal received via the electrical connection device; the electronic switching device outputs the output power signal with = and The control signal reduces the output power, the light generating means for receiving the output power signal, and for generating light; and a translucent housing for enclosing the light generating means. In other features, the on/off modulation includes a count of one of a power signal presence and a absence of a power signal during a predetermined time period. The on/off modulation includes binary data collected during the period of the period, wherein the first binary state corresponds to the presence of the power signal, and the second binary state corresponds to the absence of the power signal. The on/off modulation includes binary data determined by a period in which a power signal is present and a power signal is absent, wherein the first binary shaped echo corresponds to a period shorter than a predetermined length, the second binary bit The state corresponds to a period longer than the predetermined length. In other features, the receiving device determines the control parameter after the on/off modulation indicator program is programmed. The program plan initiation sequence includes a predetermined on/off sequence of lights during a predetermined time period. The electronic switching device reduces the output power to approximately zero when receiving the ride test cake. The electronic switching device reduces the output power signal to a down-regulated value when a control signal is received. The downgrade value is less than the power signal. In other features, the receiving device includes a power line carrier receiving device, (4) receiving data via the power signal, and relies on a command to accept one of the addressed address and the overall address. The parameter includes the first address, and the device is configured to generate the control. The power line carrier receiving device performs the operation 200835882 according to the turning-on eight-switch modulation. In other features, the operation is a reset address operation, an update address operation, a broadcast connection operation, and a transfer bit. At least one of the address operations. The receiving device further includes timing means for counting after receiving the power signal. The paving parameter includes a predetermined receiving device to generate the control number when the timing device is the predetermined device. In the other features, the receiving device is activated according to the power signal, and the power signal is cut off before the timing module reaches the pre-value. The receiving device reduces the predetermined value. When the power signal is turned off and then turned on within a predetermined time period after the timing module reaches the predetermined value, the connection is increased by a predetermined value. The receiving device reduces the predetermined value when the power signal = predetermined time__off, on, and off before the timing module reaches the predetermined value. The receiving device increases the predetermined value while the power number is turned off, on, off, and turned on within a predetermined time period after the timing device reaches the predetermined value. ° : The type 1_lamps H include H-connector and receiver connector. The first electrical connector receives a power signal from a luminaire. The connector is powered by the first electrical connector to connect (4) the power signal, according to the function of the number and #(4) to the health connection, minus the "i two a second control money. The electronic switch will output power The signal output, and: 1, the signal is reduced to reduce the output power signal. The second electrical connector accommodates the wick, and provides the output power signal to the bulb. The fiber includes ······························································································ Corresponding to the power signal storage..^77 The sorrow corresponds to the identification signal does not exist. The on/off light includes: the binary data determined by the period in which the pants domain exists and the power signal does not exist, In other features, the receiver module plans a start sequence in the on/off modulation indicator program, and (4) parameters. ······················································ The electronic switch reduces the dog's retraction to (about) the dog's retraction to about G. When receiving the control signal, the electronic switch reduces the output power signal to a declining value. The deciding value is a small thief's power signal. In the four-inch sign, the receiver module includes a power line carrier receiver module that receives the I material via the power domain, is associated with the first address, and accepts addressing the first address and the overall address. The control parameter includes the first address, the receiver module is used to generate the lake health. The power receiving body 11 module is executed according to the tool The operation is at least one of resetting an address operation, updating an address operation, a broadcast connection operation, and transmitting an address operation. The receiver module further includes a timing module, which is receiving To the power box, the wire is captured. The parameter of the miscellaneous parameter is set to a value. The device receives the control signal from the receiver module. After starting the program rule mode, the j group is based on The signal is connected to __ to set the value to be determined. When the fiber wall is turned, the power signal is at a predetermined time before the device module reaches the pre-determination in a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value in the collector module door. = two === the predetermined time period after the predetermined value, the power signal electric male thread and the conductive tip. The second new connector package materials electric yin and guide _ pick 1 reputation: neon receiving magic record; hit the place The on/off switch of the god signal is determined as follows: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ The monitoring includes: counting the presence of the power signal and the absence of the power 彳§ number during the predetermined time period. The monitoring includes collecting the binary data during the sampling period of the period, where the first binary state corresponds to In the presence of the power signal, the second binary state corresponds to the absence of the power signal. The monitoring includes collecting binary data by measuring a period in which the power signal exists and one of the power signals does not exist, wherein the first binary state corresponds to a period shorter than a predetermined length, and the second binary state corresponds to a ratio A period in which the predetermined length is long. In other features, the method further includes planning a startup sequence from the on/off modulation detection program prior to performing the determining. The program plan initiation sequence includes a predetermined on/off sequence detected during a predetermined time period. The reducing includes reducing the output power signal to one of a down-conversion value and a cut-off value when the control signal is received. In the eight-characteristics, the method further includes: receiving data overlapping on the power signal; decoding the data into a plurality of commands; and selecting the first address and the overall address addressed in the command The control parameter includes the first address; and, according to the commanded green list. The ship's wire also includes ··Na Wei/cut off the tone «Execution power line operation. The operations are at least one of a re-address operation, an update address operation, a broadcast connection operation, and a transfer address operation. /, - The towel "The green" further includes: in the fourth (4), the power test begins with the second pull-schedule. The control parameter includes the first period. When the first period has passed, it is called the operation of the CM. The method further includes: setting the __ in the startup program _ _ _ _. The method - when / before the said - period elapses 'cuts off the power signal, the reduction of the inter-term period ^ includes: # in the ship----the scheduled method of spending money includes: When ^= then turn on = the first period. When the square is turned on, the power signal is cut off, turned on, and off during the period of the increase. 200835882 A controllable light bulb adjuster includes: a first electric far ^, a -t receiving device 'for The power sample is connected and the power signal is received; the Lai is connected to the locomotive and the mosquito _ parameters, and the parameters are used to generate the control Wei, among which, the Xiao Sheqi material - the electrician county 4 connection _ riding power letter Wei electric; electronic = = discriminating the signal output and for reducing the 1°, the electrical connection device, accommodating the bulb, and providing the switchable power signal to the bulb. Π度 f Other ship's 'on/cut_change' includes a count of the power signal on the brain at a predetermined time. The miscellaneous/cutting_wei wei is in the period of the cycle of the H-carrying poor material, wherein the first-second state corresponds to the presence of the god signal, f is recorded in the pleadings of the confession The presence of the power signal and the absence of the power signal are determined by the lying data, wherein the first binary state = the corresponding length __ 'the second binary record _ should be during the long period of time. The control parameters are determined after the other features t'' the access surface miscellaneous/cut view indicates the slamming start column. The program off sequence includes a pre-on/off sequence during a predetermined time period. The electronic switching device reduces the output power to approximately zero when the control signal is received. The electronic switching device reduces the output power signal to a down-regulated value when a control signal is received. The value is less than the power signal. In other features, the receiving device includes a power line carrier receiving device for receiving data via the power and engraving the life of one of the addressed address and the overall address. And the control parameter includes the first address, and the receiving device generates the control city according to the data. The Wei Li line carrier touches the record and performs the operation by turning on / _ modulation. The operations are at least one of a reset address operation, an update address operation, a broadcast connection operation, and a transfer address operation. ^ In other features, the receiving device further includes a timing device for counting after receiving the power signal. The control parameter includes a predetermined value. The receiving device generates the control signal when the timing module reaches the predetermined value. After the program planning mode is started, the receiving device sets the predetermined value according to a period during which the power signal is turned on. The receiving device shrinks to the predetermined value when the power signal is cut off before the timing module reaches the predetermined value. In other features, the receiving device increases the predetermined value when the power signal is turned off and then turned on within a predetermined time period after the timing module reaches the predetermined value. Before the module reaches the set value, the receiving signal is reduced by the predetermined value when the discriminating signal is cut, turned on, and turned off within a predetermined time. The receiving means increases the predetermined value when the power signal is turned off, on, or turned on at a predetermined time __ after the mode is reached and the predetermined value is reached. A controllable implement includes a first electrical connection H, a receiving set, an electronic switch, and a U connector. The first electrical connection is pure power. The miscellaneous collection group is powered by the ^-electric connector to connect the (four) pants signal, and the control parameter is determined according to the power signal rhyme on/off modulation and the job transfer letter _ _ _ _ record Sexually control signals. The electronic on_output power signal is output, and the output power signal is reduced according to the control. The second electrical connector houses the bulb and ' the bulb provides the output power signal. ^ In other jobs, the machine includes a count of the power of the power at the scheduled time. The on/off_ is included in the cycle "Traditional (7) - carry material, wherein the first binary state corresponds to the (four) rate signal, and the carry state corresponds to the power signal does not exist. The connection includes power The signal of the letter does not exist—the binary data of the mosquito between the axes, wherein the first binary is shorter than the length, and the second binary state corresponds to the predetermined long movement; And executing, in the on/off_change indicator program, a control parameter, wherein the program planning start sequence comprises: during the predetermined time, the pass sequence is turned on. When the control signal is received, The electronic switch reduces it t Γ1 to about G. When the (four) control signal is connected, the electronic switch adjusts the output power signal to the power signal. 13 200835882 In other features, the receiver module includes a power line carrier receiver module, wherein t receives data from the power 彳a number, is associated with a first address, and accepts addressing the first bit = and an overall address Command: the tile parameter includes the first address The receiver module performs a job registration according to the f-material. The power-on-the-body contactor module performs an operation according to the on/off modulation. The operation # is a reset address. At least one of operation, lining operation, broadcast connection, and transmission address operation. Second, in other feature towels, the reception II further includes a timing input, which starts counting after receiving the power signal. The control parameter includes a predetermined value. When the timing module reaches the preset value, the receiving and subtracting group generates the control signal. After the program planning mode is started, the receiving peak is transferred to the money __ The mosquitoes are in front of the line. # The receiving signal is reduced by the predetermined value before the timer module reaches the predetermined value, and the receiving value is reduced by the predetermined value. During the predetermined time period of the group riding the scheduled recording, when the power signal is cut off and then turned on, the connection (four) module increases the predetermined value. The preparation is performed before the time value is difficult. Face time period ^ when switching, turning on and off, the receiver module reduces the pre- When the time is crying, the predetermined time after the county value is reached __, the power signal is jing, connected: the value of the fiber exposure. The professional connector includes the guide Distinguish the money; the interception of the recorded signal is screaming and losing enough; when the turn signal is turned on, = the control is sufficient _ fresh thief; _ lack of supply can be arbitrarily Wei; and, according to the control #号The switchable power signal is reduced. The power 'lights her: the face ^___ money exists and the bit ίϊΐίΓ counts. The monitoring includes collecting the second time during the sampling period of the chat: Beko', where the brother-binary The riding power signal exists, and the second binary rate signal is not enough. The control package is simple _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Length = Period 1, the second binary state corresponds to a period longer than the predetermined length. The method of disconnecting the second user further includes: starting the sequence from the on/off plan before executing the decision. The program plan initiation sequence includes two on/off sequences for a predetermined time period. The reduction includes when the control signal is received,

號縮減到調降值和切斷值之—。所述方法更包括:接收 命令Γ定址址:戶:,碼為複數個命令鳴所述 ;十、證一 ·、, 體位址之一的命令,其中,所述控制參數包括所 ,产甘,並且’根據所述所選擇的命令來産生所述控制信號。 綠-二:从特徵中/斤述方法更包括:根據所述接通/切斷調變來執行電力 傳送位錢作是重設位址操作、更新位址操作、廣播連接操作和 個。所述方法更包括:在接收到所述功率信號後開 本士#仃。了所述控制參數包括所述第一期間。當所述第一期 間過去2,齡賴赶所健備號的操作。 所、fti有其他概巾,所述綠更包括:在啓練式賴模式後,根據 信號接通=_來設定所述第—綱。所述方法更包括:當在所 間過去之w ’切斷所述功率信麟,縮減所述第—觸。所述方 2匕括··當在所述第-_過去後_定_期_ 率 切斷然後接通時,增加所述第—躺。所述絲更包括:在所述ί - 3 過去^前,當所述功率信號在賊時間_内峨、接通和切斷時,縮減 2第-綱。所述方法更包括:#在已經執行了所述賴之後的預定時 間期間内,所述功率信號切斷、接通、切斷、以及接通時,增加所 期間。 -種可控繼具包括:第_電連接裝置,用於接收功率信號,·接收袭 置,、用於根據所述辨信朗接勒刀__決定㈣參數,並且用於當 所述f率健麟時根伽_鮮數綠纽健號,其巾,所述接收 裝置藉由經由所述電連接裝置魏的所述神钱供電;電刊關裝置, 用^將輸a功杨號輸丨,並且用於根據所述控繼號*賴所述輸出功 率信號;第二電連接裝置,胁容納親,並且祕向所紐泡提供所述 15 200835882 輸出功率信號。 “在其他特财,所述接勒崎繼包括:在就__上對於功率 L赫在和神雜不存紅_輯數。·接通/切斷觀包括在週期的 取樣期f极集的二進位資料,射,第—二進位祕對應於辨錢存在, 第二二進位狀態對應於功率信號不存在。所述接通/喊調變包括由功率作 號存f和功率信號不存在之一的期間決定的二進位資料,其t,第一二^ 位狀悲對應於比預定長度短的期間,第二二進位狀態對應於比所述預定長 度長的期間。 ' 在其他特徵t ’所述接«置在所述接通/峨輕彳旨示財規劃啓動 序列後決定所述控制參數。_程式賴啓動相包括顧定時_間内# 執行的預定接切斷序列。當接收到所述控制信號時,所述電子開關裝置 將輸出功率信號縮減到大約〇。當·到控制信號時,所述電子開關裝置將 輸出功率信號縮減到調降值。所述調降值小於所述功率信號。 在其他特徵中’所述接收裝置包括電力線載體接收裝置,用於經由所 述功率信號而接收資料’並且用於接受定址第一位址和整體位址之一的命 令。所述控制參數包括所述第一位址,所述接收裝據所料來産生 所述控制信號。電力線細接收裝置猶騎接通/切_變而執行操 作。所述操作是重設位址操作、更新位址操作、廣播連接操作和傳送位址 操作的至少一個。 在其他特财,所賴《置更包括計時裝4,聽在接_職功· 率1號後計數。所述控制參數包括預定值。當所述計時裝置達到所述預定 值時’所述接收裝置産生所述控制信號。在啓動程式規劃模式後,所述接 收裝置根據所述轉信麟通的_來設定所翻定值1在所述計時模 組達到所述預定值之前’所述功率信號被切斷時,所述接收裝置縮減所述 預定值。 在其他特徵中,當在所述計時模組達到所述預定值後的預糾間期間 内’所述神信紐靖織接通時’職魏裝置增加所述狀值。每 在所述計時模組達騎述就值之前,所述辨信餘預定時間期間内ς 16 200835882 斷、接通和靖時’職接收裝置縮減所麵定值。當麵料時模組達 到所述預定值之後_定時__,所述轉信號切斷 、接通、切斷和 接通時,所述接收裝置增加所述預定值。 士-種可控制燈泡包括電性連接旨、接收器模組、電子開關、半透明的 殼體和光產生元件。電性連接雖收功率信號。接㈣模組藉由經由電性 連接器接㈣辨錢供電,並且在功率錄麟_職職生控制信 说。所述$子關將翻辨錢輸出’並絲據所述控繼號而縮減所 述輸出功率錄。所述半透體包住所述光産生元件。所述光産生元件 接收所述輸出功率信號。 ^其他舰巾’ t接㈣職控輸麟,所述電子關將所述輸出 功率μ縮減職降值和崎值之—。所述接㈣模組包括計時模组,盆 在接收到所述功率信號朗始計數》當所断時模組達到預定值時,所述 接收器模μ生職控術號。在製造時設定舰預定值。經由使用者輸 入而設定所述預定值。 在^他特徵中,所述使用者輸入包括撥碼封裝開關。所述接收器模組 包^唯讀=舰(職〇,其提供所述就值。#在所述計時模組達到所述 預定值,前’七刀斷所述功率信號時,所述接收器模組縮減所述預定值。當 在,述計時模組達到所述預定值之後的預定__内,所述功率信號被 切斷然後接通時,所述接收器模組增加所述預定值。 在其他特徵中,當在所述計時器模組達到所述預定值之前,所述功率 虎在預定時關_鱗、接通和墙時,所述接收11模組賴所述預 定值二當在所述計時器模組達到所述預定值之後的預定時間期間内,所述 功率信號切斷、接通、切斷和接通時,所述接收器模組增加所述預定值。 在其他特徵中,所述接收器模組包括電力線載體接收器模組,其接收 ^所述功率信號上重疊的資料,並且根據所述資料而産生所述控制信號。 當所述資料指示關燈命令時,所述電力線載體接收器模組産生所述控制信 號。所述電力線載體接收器模組與第一位址有關,並且接受定址所述第一 位址和整體位址之一的命令。在製造時設定所述第一位址。經由使用者輸 17 200835882 入而設定所述預定值。 在其他特徵中,所述使用者輸入包括撥碼開關。所述接收器模組包括 唯讀記憶體(ROM),其提供所述第一位址。所述接收器模組包括電力線載 體傳送器,並且根據所述功率信號的接通/切斷調變而指示所述電力線載體 傳送器將所述第一位址重疊在所述功率信號上。所述電性連接器包括導電 陽螺紋和導電尖端。所述光産生元件包括金屬燈絲。 一種方法包括:在燈泡處接收功率信號;將輸出功率信號向光產生元 件輸出;當所述功率信號接通時,選擇性地産生控制信號;並且,根據所 述控制信號而縮減所述輸出功率信號。 在其他特徵中,所述縮減包括··當接收到所述控制信號時,將所述輸 出功率#號縮減到調降值和切斷值之一。所述方法更包括:當接收到所述 功率#號時,開始對第一期間進行計時;並且當所述第一期間過去時,産 生所述控制信號。在所述燈泡的製造時設定所述預定值。 a在其他特徵令,經由使用者輸入而設定所述預定值。所述方法更包括: 當在所述第一期間過去之前,所述功率信號切斷時,縮減所述預定值。所 述方法更包括:當在所述第一期間過去之後的預定時間期間内,所述功率 信號切斷然後接通時,增加所述預定值。 士在其他特徵中,所述方法更包括:當在所述第一期間過去之後的預定 時間期間内,所述功率信號切斷、接通和切斷時,縮減所述預定值。所述 方,更包括:當在所述第一期間過去後的預定時間期間内,所述功率信號 =斷、接通、切斷和接通時,增加所述預定值。所述方法更包括·接收重 豐在所述功率信號上的資料。所述選擇性産生的操作根據所述資料而産生 所述控制信號。 在其他特徵中’所述選擇性産生的操作當所述資料指示關燈命令時産 ^所述控制信號。所述方法更包括:接受定址第—位址和整體位址之一的 二,。在所述燈泡的製造時設定所述第一位址。經由使用者輸入而設定所 述第位址。所述方法更包括:根據所述功率信號的接通/切斷調變的序列 而將所述第—位址重疊在所述功率信號上。 18 200835882 一種可控制燈泡包括··電連接裝置,用於接收功率信號;接收裝置, ^於當所述功率信號接通時選擇性地産生控制信號,其中,所述接^裝置 藉由經由所述電連接裝置接收的所述功率信號供電;電子開關裝置,用於 將輸出功率信號輸出,並且用於根據所述控制信號而縮減所述輸出功率信 號;光産生裝置,用於產生光,並且用於接收所述輸出功率信號;以及, 半透明殼體裝置,用於包住所述光産生裝置。 -在其他特徵中,當接收到所述控制信號時,所述電子開關裝置將所述 輸出功率信號縮減到調降值和切斷值之一。所述接收裝置包括計時裝置, 用於在接收到所述功率信號後計數。當所述計時裝置達到預定值時^所述 接收裝置産生所述控制信號。在製造時設定所述預定值。 在其他特徵令,經由使用者輸入而設定所述預定值。所述接收裝置包 $唯讀記憶體裝置,用於提供所述預定值。當在所述計時裝置達到所述預 定值之前,切斷所述功率信號時,所述接收裝置縮減所述預定值。當在所 述計時裝置_所述預定值之後的預定__內,所述功率信號^切斷 然後接通時,所述接收裝置增加所述預定值。 在其他特欲中,當在所述計時裝置達到所述預定值之前,所述功率信 $在預定時間朗㈣斷、接通和切睛,所述接收裝置縮減所述預定值。 當在所述計雜置達騎述就狀後賴定時職_,所述功率信號 切斷、接通、切斷和接通時,所述接收裝置增加所述預定值。所述接收裝 置包括電力線载體接收裝置,用於接收重疊在所述功率信號上的資料,並 用於根據所述資料産生所述控制信號。 在其他特徵中,當所述資料指示關燈命令時,所述電力線載體接收器 裝置産生所述控制信號。所述電力線載體接收器裝置與第一位址有關,並 且接受定址職第-位址和整體紐之—的命令。在製造時設定所述第一 位址。經由制者輸人*設定所料—紐。所述接錄置包括唯讀記憶 體(ROM) ’其提供所述第一位址。所述接收器模組包括電力線載體傳送裝 置,用於根據所述功率信號的接通/切斷調變的序列而將所述第一位址重疊 在所述功率信號上。 19 200835882 一種主控備包括控麵μ和遺失脈衝傳送器。所述控讎組産生用 =控!ΐ置的控制麟,所述可控職置調整負載的功率祕。遺失脈 聊裤錢,向崎可控繼置傳驗騎賴期功率信 功率信號,並且藉由在所述週期功率信號的過零點之間選擇性地 的信號振幅和功率位準的至少-個而在所述輪出功率信 所二傳送巧括開關,該開關包括:控制端,所述控制端與 括3^雔==、,以及々一端’其接收所述週期功率信號。所述開關包 元件°所述關在過零點之間的輸出功率信號中輸 $近似零轉。所駐控繼更包括:仙者介面,其包括%個輸入,盆 :’ Μ是大於-的整數;以及參數控制模組,其^ ==’其中’當啓動所述Μ個輪入之-時,所述控制:依Ϊ 所述Μ個控制參數中對應的一個來産生控制資料。 :述主控制H更包括電力線介面,其接收被重疊在所述週期功率信號 上的貝料。所賴制肋根據來自所述電力線介面的資料*産生控制資 =主控《更包括接赌料的鎌介面。所馳繼組根據來自所述I 線介面的資料而産生控制資料。 ” 所逃主控制器更包括接收器,其侧由所述可控制裝置消耗的電流, 亚且將所述魏雜_級職可㈣裝置魏的資料… 所述主控制H,並且更包括所述可控制裝置。所述可控制裝置更包括遺失 脈衝接收器’其接收所述輸出功率信號,並且藉由在所述輸出功率信號的 ^零點之間姻所述輸出功率信號的信號振幅和功率位準的至少一個上的 縮減來解碼在所述輸出功率信號中的控制資料。 所述可控制裝置更包括··控制模組,其儲存控制資料,並且根據所述 控制貧料緑生_賊;以及關,其根據所述輸出轉錄和所述控 制信號而調於負載的負載功树號。所述關包括:控繼,其接收 所迷,制信號;第-端,其接收所述輸出功率信號。所述開關將所述負載 功率信號設定為調賴、接通值和峨值之—。所述遺失脈衝接收器將在 200835882 所述過零點之_信號絲和轉位料至少 所述控継組包括計時模組。所述控制括至 所述控制健依據騎至少-個計時朗 === 包括功率位準值和計時值,其t P是大 =4=制對’其中每個控制對 述P個控制對之-,並且然後在與; 後,依據所述P健制射的另—個。 Μ 值過去 一種方法包括:產生用於可控制裝置的、 整負載的功率消耗;接收週期功率伸· 6 " a可控制裝置調 ㈣二, 向所述可控制裝置傳送依據所述 週^率減的輸出功率信號;並且,藉由選擇性地縮減在所述週期功率 仏唬的過零點之間的輪出功率信號的信號振幅 所述輸出功率信號中編碼控制資料。 千補主V個來在 ,所述方法更包括:選擇性地將所述過零點之間的所述輸出功 數,並且當所述μ個輪人對應⑽個控制參 破口動守根據所述Μ個控制參數中對應的 生所«料。所財法更紐:接碰重疊麵述週期功率 μ上的並且爾職重疊資料喊生所雜触號。 羊 产生括:無線地接㈣料’並且依據所述無線接收的資料而 產生所速控制貝料。所述方法更包括:侧由所述可控制裝置消耗的電流, 亚且將所述電_轉韻從所述可補裝難㈣資料,述方勺 =接收所述輪出功率信號’並且藉由在所述輸出功率信號的過零點之二 、”所述輸自裤信號的雜振幅和神轉的至少—個上雜減來 在所述輪出功率信號中的控制資料。 π巧 、、所述方?更包括:根據所述控师料來產生控制親;並且,根據所 逑輸出功率錢和所述控備號而調細於貞細貞載辨信號。所述方 法更包括··將所述負载功率信號設定為調降值、接通值和切斷值之一。所 述方法更包括:將在所述過零狀間的信號振幅和神轉的至少 預定值相比較。 〃 21 200835882 且二:ΐίΐ二控制資料而對至少-個期間進行計時’並 制對,其中每個控制對^生^^號。所述方法更包括:儲存P個控 所述方法編: ==:r計時值過去後,依據所述 所料置=於f生服可控概置的控制資料, 功率作味的力率扁耗,退失脈衝傳送裝置,用於接收週期 率“失脈衝傳送裝置向所述可控制裝置傳送依據所述週期功 號’並a用於藉由在所述週期功率信號的過零點之間 ^擇f峰減輸出功率信號的信號振仏 出功率信號中編碼控制資料。 种位半的主夕個而在所錢 7述脈衝傳送裝置包酬關,刻·括:制 =連;以及第-端’其接收所述週期功率信號。所 括 I控石夕開關元件。所述·在過零點之間的輸出 出 t所=控=更包括:使用者介面裝置,用於從使用者接收 == 八 疋大於的整數;以及參數控制裝置,其儲存與所述Μ個 ^^的Μ個控制參數’其中’當啓動所述1^個輸入之一時、,所述控制 衣置依據所4 Μ個鋪參數巾對應的—個來産生測資料。 率面裝置,用於接收被重疊在所述週期功 的貝枓。所述控概置根據來自所述電力線介面裝置的 所、3二。所述主控制器更包括無線地接收資料的無線介面裝置, 斤义控制裝置根據所述無線接收的資料而產生控制資料。 、古所述主控制器更包括接收裝置,用於侧由所述可控制襄置消耗的帝 亚且用於將所述電㈣耗解碼為從所述可控織置接㈣資料。: 系統包括所述主控,並且更包括所述可控制裝置。所述可控制爭 包括遺失脈衝接收裝i,用於接收所述輸出功率信號,並且藉由在輯 出功率信號的過零點之間細職触神信號的信號絲和轉位準的4 22 200835882 至少一個上的縮減來解碼在所述輸出功率信號中的控制資料。 所述可控制裝置更包括:控制裝置,其儲存控制資料, 控制資料來産生控継號;以及開置,胁根據所述輸㈣^ = 所述控制魏_整躲貞_負載功率信號。所鋼難置包括^ 端,其接收所述控制信號;第-端,其接收所述輸出功率信號 = 裝置將所述負载功率信號設定為調降值、接通值和切斷值之:。所、^失 ,衝接收裝ϊ將在所親零狀關信雜幅和辨轉的至少預 定值相比較。 〃、 所述控制裝置包括計時裝置,用於對至少一個期間進行計時。所述控 制貧料包括所述至少-靖時躺。職㈣慨是依據所述計時裝^ 的。所述可_裝置更包括參數儲存裝置’麟與所述控做置相連,並 且^於儲存P個舖對’其巾每健鑛包括轉辦值和計雜,其中, P是大於零的整數。所述控制信號依據所述p個控制對之一,並且然後、在與 所述P個控制對中該有關的計時值過去後,依據所述p個控制對中'的另2 個。 ^ 一種可控制裝置包括··遺失脈衝接收器,其接收第一功率信號,並且 藉由在所述第-神信賴過零點之間侧所述第—功率信號的信號振幅 =功率位準魅少—個上麟絲解碼在所述第—功率信號巾的控制資 料控制彳果、、且’其儲存所述控制資料,並且根據所述控制資料而産生控制 仏號,以及開關,其根據所述第一功率信號和所述控制信號來調整用於 載的負载功率信號。 、、 …所述開關包括:控制端,其接收所述控制信號;第一端,其接收所述 第一功率信號。所述遺失脈衝接收器將在所述過零點之間的信號振幅和功 率位準的至少、個與預定值相比較。所述開關將所述負載功率信號設定爲 調降值、接通值和切斷值之一。所述控制模組包括計時模組。所述控制資 料I括冲8守期間。所述控制信號是依據所述計時期間的。所述可控制農置 更,括參數儲存模組,其與所述控制模組相連,並且儲存P個控制對,其 中每個控制對包括功率位準值和計時值,其中,p是大於一的整數。 23 200835882 所速p個控制對是依據所述控制資料的。所述控制信號依據所述p個 控制對之-’並且織在與所述P個控制對中該有義計時值過去後,依 f所述p個_财的另-個。娜騎㈣雜來選擇在絲儲存模組 ==述P健麟㈣至少—個。—種祕包括所述可控繼置,並且 =括主控制器。所述主控包括:控制模組,其産生用於所述可控制 ’其接收週期功率信號,向所述可 ,制,置傳诚據職聊功率信號騎述第—轉健,並且藉由在所 信號的過零點之間選擇性地縮減第—功率信號的信號振幅和功 率位準的至少一個而在所述第_功率信號中編碼控制資料。 =遺失脈衝傳送器包括開關,該開關包括··控制端,其與所述控制 二:、/以及第—端’其接收所述週期功率信號。所述開關包括三端雙 元件。所述關在過零點之騎所述第—功率信號情出近 =功率。所述主控制II更包括:使用者介面,其包個輸人,宜中, 個:數 Μ個控制餘帽麟—姉^_^ % ’所述㈣歡依據所述 上的ΪΪ主括電力線介面’其接收被重疊在所述週期功率信號 貝枓。所賴偷組根據來自所述電力線介 13=制f更包括接收資_線介面。所述控制模組根 j線㈣的貧料而產生控糖料。所述主控彻更包括接收器 織置雜的錢,並且贿述錢絲料_所述可控 制衣置的用於所述主控制器的資料。 點之間第一功率信號·’藉由在所述第一功率信號的過零 來解號的信號振幅和功率位準的至少一個上的縮減 信號.# H 率仏號中的控制貧料,·根據所述控制資料而產生控制 载功°率信號 第—鱗錢和所述_親_整麟賴的負 所述方法更包括··將在所述過零點之間的信號振幅和功率位準的至少 24 200835882 :個與預定值減較。紐更包括:將賴貞載轉健設定爲調降 一、接通值和切斷值之一。所述方法更包括:根據所述控制資料而對至少 、、個期間進行計時’並且根制述至少—個綱而產生所述控制信號。所 述方法更包括:贿P健鑛,其巾每個浦對包括功率位準值和 值,其中,P是大於一的整數。 所述P個控制對是依據所述控制資料的。所述方法更包括:根據所述p 二^制對之來産生戶斤述控制#號,並且,在與戶斤述p控制對中該有關的 十¥值過去後依據所述p個控制對中的另一個而産生控制信號。所述方法The number is reduced to the value of the cutoff value and the cutoff value. The method further includes: receiving a command address: the user:, the code is a plurality of commands, and the command is one of the body address, wherein the control parameter includes: And generating the control signal in accordance with the selected command. The green-two: from the feature method further includes: performing power transfer according to the on/off modulation to reset the address operation, update the address operation, and broadcast the connection operation. The method further includes: after receiving the power signal, driving the speaker #仃. The control parameter includes the first period. When the first period of the past 2, the age of the operation of the health care number. The fti has other generalized tissues, and the green includes: after the start-up mode, the first-order is set according to the signal connection =_. The method further includes reducing the first touch when the power signal is cut in the past w'. The party 2 includes the first lying when the first-to-be-definite_rate_rate is cut off and then turned on. The wire further includes: before the ί - 3 past, when the power signal is 峨 峨 峨 接通 接通 接通 接通 接通 接通 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。. The method further includes: # increasing the period when the power signal is turned off, on, off, and turned on during a predetermined time period after the aging has been performed. - a controllable relay comprising: a first electrical connection device for receiving a power signal, a receiving attack, a parameter for determining a (four) parameter according to the discrimination, and for using the f rate Jian Lin Shi Gen Jia _ fresh number green button, its towel, the receiving device is powered by the god money via the electrical connection device Wei; the electric bulletin device, with ^ will lose a power Yang number And outputting a power signal according to the control number; the second electrical connection device is configured to provide the 15 200835882 output power signal. "In other special wealth, the said Lezaki follow-up includes: on the __ for the power Lhe and the gods do not save red _ number. · On/off view included in the sampling period of the period f set The binary data, the shot, the first-second binary corresponds to the existence of the discriminating money, and the second binary state corresponds to the absence of the power signal. The turn-on/call modulation includes the fact that the power is stored and the power signal does not exist. The binary data determined during one of the periods, t, the first two-bit sorrow corresponds to a period shorter than a predetermined length, and the second binary state corresponds to a period longer than the predetermined length. 'The connection' determines the control parameter after the start/slap operation plan startup sequence. The program start phase includes the scheduled connection sequence executed by the timing_interval #. When the control signal is reached, the electronic switching device reduces the output power signal to approximately 〇. When the control signal is reached, the electronic switching device reduces the output power signal to a down-regulated value. Power signal. In other features, the reception Included is a power line carrier receiving device for receiving data 'via the power signal' and for accepting a command addressing one of the first address and the overall address. The control parameter includes the first address, The receiving signal is generated to generate the control signal. The power line fine receiving device is operated to perform the operation by resetting the address operation, updating the address operation, broadcasting the connection operation, and transmitting the address. At least one of the operations. In other special financial matters, the device further includes a timed device 4, which is counted after receiving the number of the job. The control parameter includes a predetermined value. When the timing device reaches the predetermined date The receiving device generates the control signal when the program is started. After the program planning mode is started, the receiving device sets the set value 1 according to the _ of the transfer letter to reach the predetermined time in the timing module. The receiving device reduces the predetermined value when the power signal is cut off before the value. In other features, the god is in the pre-correction period after the timing module reaches the predetermined value Letter When the weaving is turned on, the 'Wowei device increases the value. Before each time the chronograph module reaches the value of the ride, the quotation is within the predetermined time period of the ς16 200835882. The device reduces the set value. When the fabric module reaches the predetermined value _ timing__, the receiving device increases the predetermined value when the turn signal is cut off, turned on, cut off, and turned on. The control light bulb comprises an electrical connection, a receiver module, an electronic switch, a translucent housing and a light generating component. The electrical connection receives the power signal. The (4) module is connected via the electrical connector (4) Divide the money supply, and in the power record Lin _ occupational control letter said. The $ child off will dig the money output 'and reduce the output power record according to the control number. The semi-transparent package The light generating element receives the output power signal. ^Other ship towels are connected to the (four) job control, and the electronic switch reduces the output power μ by the duty drop value and the rugged value - . The connection (four) module includes a timing module, and the receiver receives the power signal and starts counting. When the module reaches a predetermined value when the module is disconnected, the receiver molds the occupational control number. The ship's predetermined value is set at the time of manufacture. The predetermined value is set via user input. In the feature, the user input includes a dialing package switch. The receiver module package only reads = ship (the job provides the value. # When the timing module reaches the predetermined value, the first 'seven cuts the power signal, the receiving The module reduces the predetermined value. When the power signal is cut off and then turned on within a predetermined time__ after the timing module reaches the predetermined value, the receiver module increases the predetermined In other features, the receiving 11 module depends on the predetermined value when the power tiger turns off the scale, the switch, and the wall when the timer module reaches the predetermined value. The receiver module increases the predetermined value when the power signal is turned off, on, off, and turned on within a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value. In other features, the receiver module includes a power line carrier receiver module that receives data superimposed on the power signal and generates the control signal based on the data. When the command is issued, the power line carrier receiver module generates the The power line carrier receiver module is associated with the first address and accepts a command to address one of the first address and the overall address. The first address is set at the time of manufacture. In the other feature, the user input includes a dial switch. The receiver module includes a read only memory (ROM) that provides the first address. The receiver module includes a power line carrier transmitter and instructing the power line carrier transmitter to overlap the first address address on the power signal according to an on/off modulation of the power signal. The electrical connector includes a conductive male thread and a conductive tip. The light generating element comprises a metal filament. A method comprising: receiving a power signal at a bulb; outputting an output power signal to a light generating component; when the power signal is turned on Selectively generating a control signal; and reducing the output power signal in accordance with the control signal. In other features, the reducing comprises: receiving the When the signal is formed, the output power # is reduced to one of the down-conversion value and the cut-off value. The method further includes: when receiving the power # number, starting to time the first period; The control signal is generated when the first period elapses. The predetermined value is set at the time of manufacture of the bulb. a. In other features, the predetermined value is set via user input. The method further includes: The predetermined value is reduced when the power signal is turned off before the first period elapses. The method further includes: cutting off the power signal during a predetermined time period after the first period elapses Then, when turned on, the predetermined value is increased. In other features, the method further includes: turning off, turning on, and off the power signal during a predetermined time period after the first period elapses And reducing the predetermined value. The party further comprising: adding the power signal=off, on, off, and on during a predetermined time period after the first period elapses Predetermined value. The method further includes receiving data that is heavy on the power signal. The selectively generated operation generates the control signal based on the data. In other features, the selectively generated operation produces the control signal when the data indicates a turn off command. The method further includes accepting two of the address-address and the one of the overall addresses. The first address is set at the time of manufacture of the bulb. The first address is set via user input. The method further includes overlapping the first address on the power signal based on a sequence of on/off modulations of the power signal. 18 200835882 A controllable light bulb comprising: an electrical connection device for receiving a power signal; a receiving device, selectively generating a control signal when the power signal is turned on, wherein the connection device is Supplying the power signal received by the electrical connection device; electronic switching means for outputting an output power signal, and for reducing the output power signal according to the control signal; light generating means for generating light, and And for receiving the output power signal; and a translucent housing device for enclosing the light generating device. In other features, the electronic switching device reduces the output power signal to one of a down-conversion value and a cut-off value when the control signal is received. The receiving device includes timing means for counting after receiving the power signal. The receiving device generates the control signal when the timing device reaches a predetermined value. The predetermined value is set at the time of manufacture. In other features, the predetermined value is set via user input. The receiving device package $read-only memory device is configured to provide the predetermined value. The receiving device reduces the predetermined value when the power signal is turned off before the timing device reaches the predetermined value. The receiving device increases the predetermined value when the power signal is turned off and then turned on within a predetermined time__ after the predetermined time value of the timing device. In other particulars, the receiving device reduces the predetermined value by a predetermined time before the timing device reaches the predetermined value, the power signal is turned off, turned on, and cut in at a predetermined time. The receiving device increases the predetermined value when the power signal is turned off, on, off, and turned on after the metering is set. The receiving device includes power line carrier receiving means for receiving data superimposed on the power signal and for generating the control signal based on the data. In other features, the power line carrier receiver device generates the control signal when the data indicates a light-off command. The power line carrier receiver device is associated with the first address and accepts commands to address the job-address and the overall address. The first address is set at the time of manufacture. Set the material through the system to enter the person * New Zealand. The directory includes a read only memory (ROM)' which provides the first address. The receiver module includes a power line carrier transmitting device for overlaying the first address on the power signal in accordance with a sequence of on/off modulation of the power signal. 19 200835882 A master control device includes a control surface μ and a lost pulse transmitter. The control group generates a control arm with a control device, and the controllable position adjusts the power of the load. Losing the pulse of the trousers, the controllable relay is sent to the Qiqi, and the at least one of the signal amplitude and the power level is selectively selected between the zero crossings of the periodic power signal. And in the turn-off power signal, the switch comprises: a control end, the control end and the 々 end, and the 々 end, which receives the periodic power signal. The switch pack component is in the output power signal between the zero crossings and is subjected to approximately zero revolutions. The stationed control further includes: the fairy interface, which includes % inputs, the basin: 'Μ is an integer greater than -; and the parameter control module, which ^ == 'where 'when the first round is started - The control: generating control data according to a corresponding one of the one of the control parameters. The main control H further includes a power line interface that receives the material that is superimposed on the periodic power signal. The ribs are based on the data from the power line interface* to generate control funds = the main control "more includes the interface of the gambling material. The control group generates control data based on data from the I-line interface. The escaping master controller further includes a receiver whose side is consumed by the controllable device, and the data of the Wei _ _ _ _ _ (4) device Wei... the main control H, and more includes The controllable device further includes a lost pulse receiver that receives the output power signal and that the signal amplitude and power of the output power signal are between the zero points of the output power signal The at least one of the levels is reduced to decode the control data in the output power signal. The controllable device further includes a control module that stores control data and controls the poor green _ thief according to the And off, which is adjusted to the load power tree number of the load according to the output transcription and the control signal. The switch includes: a control, which receives the signal, and a signal, and a first end that receives the output a power signal. The switch sets the load power signal to a value of a turn-on, a turn-on value, and a threshold value. The lost pulse receiver will have at least the signal line and index material of the zero-crossing point described in 200835882 control The group includes a timing module. The control includes the control of the ride according to at least one of the timings === including the power level value and the timing value, where t P is large = 4 = paired 'each of the control pairs The P control pairs are - and then after and after, according to the P-fired, another method. 过去 Values One method includes: generating power consumption for the entire load of the controllable device; receiving cycle The power extension 6 " a controllable device adjusts (4) two, transmits an output power signal according to the cycle rate to the controllable device; and, by selectively reducing the power in the cycle a signal amplitude of the round-robin power signal between the zero points encodes the control data in the output power signal. The method further includes: selectively outputting the output power between the zero-crossing points Number, and when the μ wheel people correspond to (10) control parameters, the trajectory is traversed according to the corresponding one of the control parameters. The financial method is more: the overlapping overlapping surface power μ And the overlapping information of the staff is called the birth number. : wirelessly connecting (four) material 'and generating a speed control beaker according to the wirelessly received data. The method further comprises: side consuming current consumed by the controllable device, and sub The refillable (four) data, the square spoon = receiving the round-robin power signal 'and by the zero-crossing point of the output power signal, "the amplitude and the divergence of the signal from the pants At least one of the control data in the rounded power signal is subtracted. The method further includes: generating a control pro according to the controller; and, according to the output power and the control number, fine-tuning the signal. The method further includes setting the load power signal to one of a downshift value, an on value, and a cutoff value. The method further includes comparing the amplitude of the signal between the zero-crossings to at least a predetermined value of the diurnal. 〃 21 200835882 and two: ΐ ΐ ΐ 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制 控制The method further comprises: storing P controls, the method is edited: ==: r, after the chrono value is past, according to the control data of the material control = controllable, the power rate is flat A lossy pulse transfer device for receiving a periodic rate "an out-of-pulse transmitting device transmits to the controllable device according to the periodic function number" and a is used by a zero crossing between the periodic power signals ^ Selecting the signal of the f-peak minus output power signal to oscillate the power control signal in the power signal. The prime half of the seed half is in the charge of the money transfer device, including: system = company; and - The terminal 'receives the periodic power signal. The I-controlled switch element is included. The output between the zero-crossing points t = control = further includes: a user interface device for receiving from the user = = an integer greater than eight; and a parameter control device that stores one of the control parameters of the one of the '^' when the one of the inputs is activated, the control device is based on the The corresponding parameter of the paving parameter towel is used to generate the measured data. The control device is superimposed on the power of the periodicity device. The control device is based on the device from the power line interface device. The main controller further includes a wireless interface device that wirelessly receives data, and the control device is Generating control data according to the wirelessly received data. The master controller further includes receiving means for side consumption by the controllable device and for decoding the electrical (four) consumption into a slave The controllable weaving (4) data: the system includes the master, and further includes the controllable device. The controllable contention includes a missing pulse receiving device i for receiving the output power signal, and borrowing The control data in the output power signal is decoded by a reduction in at least one of the signal line and the indexing 4 22 200835882 between the zero crossings of the power signal. The utility model further comprises: a control device, which stores the control data, controls the data to generate the control number; and the opening, the threat according to the input (four) ^ = the control Wei_the whole hiding _ load power signal. end, Receiving the control signal; the first end receiving the output power signal=the device sets the load power signal to a value of a down-regulation, an on-off value, and a cut-off value: The at least one predetermined value is compared with the at least predetermined value of the discretion. 控制, the control device includes a timing device for timing at least one period. The control lean includes the at least The lie (4) is based on the timing device. The _ device further includes a parameter storage device 'Lin is connected to the control device, and ^ stores P pairs of pavements. a turn-off value and a hash, wherein P is an integer greater than zero. The control signal is in accordance with one of the p control pairs, and then, after the associated timing value in the P control pairs has elapsed, According to the other two of the p control pairs. ^ A controllable device comprising: a lost pulse receiver, which receives a first power signal, and wherein the signal amplitude of the first power signal = the power level is less between the first and the reliance on the zero crossing point a control signal for controlling the data in the first power signal towel, and 'which stores the control data, and generates a control nick according to the control data, and a switch according to the The first power signal and the control signal adjust a load power signal for the load. The switch includes: a control terminal that receives the control signal; and a first terminal that receives the first power signal. The missing pulse receiver compares at least one of a signal amplitude and a power level between the zero crossings with a predetermined value. The switch sets the load power signal to one of a down value, an on value, and a cut value. The control module includes a timing module. The control information I is included during the rush period. The control signal is based on the timing period. The controllable farm includes a parameter storage module connected to the control module and storing P control pairs, wherein each control pair includes a power level value and a timing value, wherein p is greater than one The integer. 23 200835882 The speed of p control pairs is based on the control data. The control signal is based on the p control pairs -' and is woven in the other of the P control pairs, and the other ones of the p _ _. Na riding (four) miscellaneous to choose the silk storage module == said P Jianlin (four) at least one. - The secret includes the controllable relay, and = the main controller. The master control includes: a control module, configured to generate, for the controllable period, a power signal of the receiving period, to the said system, to the said Control data is encoded in the first power signal by selectively reducing at least one of a signal amplitude and a power level of the first power signal between zero crossings of the signal. = Lost pulse transmitter includes a switch including a control terminal that receives the periodic power signal with the control two:, / and the first terminal. The switch includes a three-terminal dual element. The riding of the first-power signal is close to the power at the zero crossing point. The main control II further includes: a user interface, which includes a user, a medium, and a number of controls: a plurality of controls, Yu Maolin, 姊^_^%, said (4), according to the above-mentioned ΪΪ main power line The interface 'its reception is superimposed on the periodic power signal. The sneak group includes a receiving resource interface according to the power line. The control module generates a sugar control material by the poor material of the root line (4). The master control further includes receiving money from the receiver, and bribing the money material to the controllable clothing for the main controller. a first power signal between the points - a reduced signal at least one of a signal amplitude and a power level of the solution number by a zero crossing of the first power signal. Deriving a control load rate signal according to the control data - the scale and the negative method of the _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ At least 24 200835882: a comparison with the predetermined value. Newcomer includes: setting Lai's load to one of the turn-on and cut-off values. The method further includes: timing the at least one period based on the control data and generating the control signal by at least one of the roots. The method further includes: bribing the P-mine, each of which includes a power level value and a value, wherein P is an integer greater than one. The P control pairs are based on the control data. The method further includes: generating a household control number according to the p2, and, after the ten value associated with the household control p, is based on the p control pairs The other one produces a control signal. The method

更包括:根據所述控制資料來選擇在參數儲存模組中的所述P個控 所述的那一個。 ' =述方法更包括:接收週期功率信號,傳送依據所述週期功率信號的 =述第功率t號,並且猎由在所述週期功率信號的過零點之間選擇性地 、、宿減第功率#號的“號振幅和功率位準的至少一個而在所述第一功率俨 ,中編碼控糖料。所述方法更包括:在過零點之隨所述第_功率信號 縮減到近似零神。所述方法更包括]贿與M織人對應的M個控制^ 數’亚且當啓動所述Μ個輸入之一時,依據所述M個控制參數中一 個來産生控制資料。 "" 所,方法更包括:接收被重疊在所述週期功率信號上的資料,並且根 據所重豐的貧料而産生㈣資料。所述方法更包括··無線地接收資料,並 且根據所錢線接㈣資料喊生浦資料。騎方法更包括:鋼由所 述可控制、裝置雜的電流,並且將所述電流雜解碼為從所述可控制裝置 、,一種可控制裝置包括:遺失脈衝接收裝置,用於接收第一功率信號, =且用於藉由在所述第—功率信號的過零點之間細所述第―功率信號的 信號振幅和功率辦的至少—個上的賴祕碼在所述第—辨信^的 控制資料;控制裝置,儲存所述控锻料,並朋於根據所^控°制資 料而産生控偷號;以及,開關裝置,用於根據所述第一神信號和所述 控制j吕號來調整用於負載的負載功率信號。 25 200835882 所述開關裝置包括:控制端,其接收所述控制信號;第一端,盆接收 =第-功率信號1述遺失脈衝魏裝置將在所述過零點之間驗號振 幅和功率位準的至少―健預定值她較。所述卿裝置將所述負載功率 k號设定為調降值、接通值和切斷值之一❶所述控制裝置包括計時裝置, 用於對至少一個期間進行計時。所述控制資料包括所述至少一個期^所 述控制信號是依據所述計時期間的。 所述可控制裝置更包括參數儲存模組’用於與所述控制裝置相連,並 且用於儲存P個控制對’其中每健制對包括功率位準值和計時值,其中, P是大於-數。规P健騎是依制馳着料的。舰控制信號 依據所述p健繼之…並域後摘職p她觸巾該有關的計υ 值過去後,依據所述Ρ個控制對中的另一個。 、 根據所述_資料來_在參數贿裝置巾騎述ρ個湖對令的至 少^固。-種系統包括所述可控制裝置,並且更包括主控制器。所述主控 制盗包括:控制裝置’用於産生用於所述可控繼置的鋪資料;以及, 遺失脈衝傳送裝置,麟接㈣期醉信號’向霞可控健置傳送 所述週期神信韻所述第—神健,並且藉由麵述聊辨信 過零點之間選雜地賴^ -轉信躺信舰幅和轉辦的至少二個 而在所述第一功率信號中編碼控制資料。 所述遺失脈衝傳送裝置包括關,該開關包括:控制端,其與所述控 制裝置相連;以及第-端,其接收所述週期功率信號。所述關包括三^ 雙向可控㈣航件。所述麵在過零點之間的所述第—功率㈣中& 近似零功率。所述主控制器更包括:制者介面裝置,用於接^之 -,其中,MS大於-的整數;以及參數控制裝置,用於儲存與所述μ個 輸入對應的Μ個控制參數,其中,當啓動所述Μ個輸入之—時,所制 裝置依據所述Μ個控制參數中對應的一個來產生控制資料。 …所述f湖ϋ更包括電力齡面裝置,其接收被重疊麵述週期功率 仏號亡的資料。所述控制裝置根據來自所述電力線介面裝置的資料而產生 控制資料。所述主控制器更包括用於接收資料的無線介面裝置。、所述=制 26 200835882 ΐΐίϊΐΓ輸線介面裝置的雜㈣生鋪跡所駐控制器更 細由所述可控制裝置雜的電流,並且用於將所述 电^耗~碼為來自所述可控制裝置的用於所述主控制嚣的資料。 ㈣財賴純括1麵組,其纽祕可㈣裝置的程式 叶時i和功ifI控制裝置調整負载的功率消耗,所述程式規劃資料包括 少之—;以及_脈_送11,其接收週期功率 所述可控制裝置傳送依據所述週期功率信號的輸出功率信號,並 jriTt週期功率信號的過零點之間選擇性地賴輸出功率信號的信 =振Mu功率辦的至少一個而在所述輪出功率信射編碼程式規劃資 “所述遺失脈衝傳送器包括開關’該開關包括:控制端,其與所述控 权組相連;以及第-端,其接收所述週期神信號。所述關包括三ς雔 向可卿Μ元件。所删瓣狀_雜裤信射触近似= 功率。所述安裝程式賴器更包括:使用者介面,其包括Μ個輸入, μ是大於-雜數;讀參健繼n贿與錄入對應的μ 個程式簡參數,其t,#軸所魏墙人之—時,職蝴模組依據 所述Μ個控制參數_對應的一個來産生所述程式規劃資料。 、所述安裝程式規劃器更包括接收器,其偵測由所述可控制裝置消耗的 電流,、並且將所述電流消耗解碼為從所述可控制裝置接收的資料。所述安 裝程式規tm更包括轉雜纖體。所雜制歡在職雜發性記情 體中儲存從可測裝置接㈣雜,並絲據麵述雜發性記憶^ 中儲存的資料而選擇性地産生所述程式規劃資料。 _ 所述程式規劃資料包括計時值和功率位準值的至少一對。一種系統包 括所述女裝程式規劃态,並且更包括所述可控制裝置。所述可控制ϋ更 包括遺失脈衝接收器,其接收所述輸出功率信號,並且藉由在所述輪出功 率信號的過零點之間偵測所述輸出功率信號的信號振幅和功率位準的至少 一個上的縮減來解碼在所述輸出功率信號中的所述程式規劃資料。 所述可控制裝置更包括·控制模組,其儲存所述程式規劃資料,根據 27 200835882 =述程式賴資料來産生_資料,並且根據所職 ==及_ ’其根據所述輪出辨信號和所述控制信號而調 = 的負載功率信號。所述開關包括:控_,其接收所述控齡號^載 繼,侧細貞她嫩^調降值、 所述遺失脈衝接收器將在所述過零點之間的所述信號 振幅相比較。所述遺失脈衝接收器將在所述過零 雜 少一個計時躺。所義備號是依據所鞋少—個計_=1括至 且用包括參數儲存模組,用於與所述控制模組相連,並 if ΓΓΐ #每個控制對包括功率位準值和計時值,其中, 疋」零的紐。所述控制信號依據所述ρ個控制對之一,並且铁後在與 控制對中所述的—個有關的計時值過去後依據所《個““ 署喊法包括:產生餘可控制裝置峰式規難料,所述可控制裝 少戶Γ程式規劃資料包括計時值和功率位準值的至 二Ϊμ,力率信號;向所述可控制裝置傳送依據所述週期功率信 =上號;並且藉由在所述週期功率信號的過零點之間選擇性地 號娜㈣雜料至少—細麵雜出功率信 更包括:在過零點之騎所述触辨信號 一時,依據所述㈣控制參數中對顧—個來産生所述程 二方法更包括:細由所述可控制裝置消耗的電流,並且 將所湞耗解碼為從所述可控制裝置接收的資料。 收的:在所述非輸__存從崎裝置接 ==查,丨=述可控制裝置接收的所述資料而選擇性地產生所 式規“料。所述程式規織料包括計時值和功率位準值的至少一 28 200835882 對。所述方法更包括··接收所述輸出功率信號,並且藉由在所述輸出功率 信號的過零點之間偵測所述輪出功率信號的信號振幅和功率位準的至少一 個上的縮減來解碼在所述輸出功率信號中的所述程式規劃資料。 所述方法更包括:根據所述程式規劃資料來産生控制信號,根據所述 控制貧料而産生控制信號,並且根據所述輸出功率信號和所述^^制信號而 調整用於貞細貞載神信號。所述方法更包括將所述貞載功率信號設定 爲調降值、接通值和切斷值之一。所述方法更包括:根據所述控制資料而 對至少一個期間進行計時,並且根據所述至少一個期間而産生所述控制俨 號。 口The method further includes: selecting, according to the control data, the one of the P controls in the parameter storage module. The method further includes: receiving a periodic power signal, transmitting a power t number according to the periodic power signal, and selectively selecting, sinking, and reducing the power between zero crossings of the periodic power signal. The at least one of the #number amplitude and the power level encodes the sugar control in the first power 。. The method further comprises: reducing the _th power signal to a near zero god at the zero crossing point The method further includes: bribing the M control numbers corresponding to the M weavers and when one of the one inputs is activated, generating control data according to one of the M control parameters. "" The method further includes: receiving data superimposed on the periodic power signal, and generating (4) data according to the rich and poor material. The method further comprises: wirelessly receiving data, and receiving according to the money line. (4) The data is called the Shengpu data. The riding method further comprises: the steel is controlled by the current, and the current is decoded into the controllable device, and the controllable device comprises: the lost pulse receiving device ,use Receiving a first power signal, = and for modulating at least one of a signal amplitude and a power of the first power signal between the zero crossings of the first power signal - a control device for identifying the information; a control device for storing the controlled forging material, and for generating a control number according to the control data; and a switching device for using the first god signal and the The control device is configured to adjust the load power signal for the load. 25 200835882 The switching device includes: a control terminal that receives the control signal; a first end, a basin receiving = a first power signal, a missing pulse device Comparing at least the predetermined value of the check amplitude and the power level between the zero crossings, the clearing device sets the load power k number as the downshift value, the turn-on value, and the cutoff value. The control device includes a timing device for timing at least one period. The control data includes the at least one period of the control signal being according to the timing period. The control device further includes parameters Storage module 'use Connected to the control device, and used to store P control pairs, wherein each of the health pairs includes a power level value and a timing value, wherein P is greater than - number. The ship control signal is based on the p-threshold... after the field is taken off, and the relevant count value of the touched towel is passed, and the other one of the control pairs is based on the one of the control pairs. The parameter bribe device includes at least one of the control units, and further includes a main controller. The main control thief includes: a control device for generating the Controllable relaying of the data; and, the loss of the pulse transmission device, the lining (four) period of drunken signal 'to the Xia controllable health station to transmit the said period of the Shenxin rhyme said - Shenjian, and by means of face to face The control information is encoded in the first power signal by selecting between the zero crossings and the at least two of the letter and the transfer. The lost pulse transmitting device includes a switch, the switch including: a control terminal coupled to the control device; and a first terminal receiving the periodic power signal. The off includes three ^ two-way controllable (four) navigation pieces. The face is in the first power (four) between zero crossings & approx. zero power. The main controller further includes: a maker interface device for connecting - wherein the MS is greater than - an integer; and parameter control means for storing a plurality of control parameters corresponding to the μ inputs, wherein When the input is initiated, the device generates control data according to a corresponding one of the control parameters. The f lake includes a power age device that receives data that is overlapped and described as periodic power. The control device generates control data based on data from the power line interface device. The main controller further includes a wireless interface device for receiving data. The system of the system is used to control the current of the control device, and the code is used to The data of the control device for the main control port. (4) The financial base consists of a one-sided group, and its secrets can be used to adjust the power consumption of the load, and the program planning information includes less - and _ pulse_delivery 11, receiving Periodic power The controllable device transmits an output power signal according to the periodic power signal, and the zero-crossing point of the jriTt periodic power signal is selectively dependent on at least one of the signal power of the output power signal. The round-robin power signal encoding program "the lost pulse transmitter includes a switch" includes: a control end connected to the control group; and a first end receiving the periodic god signal. The cover includes three ς雔 可 可 。 。 。 所 所 所 所 所 所 所 所 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 。 Reading the parameters of the μ-simplification parameters corresponding to the bribe and the entry, and the t-axis of the Wei-Wings, the job module generates the program according to the corresponding one of the control parameters _ Planning information. The wiper further includes a receiver that detects current consumed by the controllable device and decodes the current consumption as data received from the controllable device. The installation program tm further includes a rotating fiber The program is prepared by selectively storing the program information from the measurable device and storing the data stored in the heterogeneous memory ^ in the miscellaneous sympathetic body. The programming information includes at least one pair of timing values and power level values. A system includes the womens program programming state and further includes the controllable device. The controllable device further includes a missing pulse receiver. Receiving the output power signal and decoding the output power signal by detecting a decrease in at least one of a signal amplitude and a power level of the output power signal between zero crossings of the turn-off power signal The program planning information further includes: a control module, wherein the program planning data is stored, and the data is generated according to 27 200835882 The job == and _ 'the load power signal that is adjusted according to the round-out signal and the control signal. The switch includes: control_, which receives the control age number, and the side is fine She is down, the missing pulse receiver compares the amplitude of the signal between the zero crossings. The lost pulse receiver will lie in the zero crossing for one time. The number is based on the number of shoes _=1 and includes a parameter storage module for connecting to the control module, and if ΓΓΐ # each control pair includes a power level value and a timing value, wherein , 疋" zero new. The control signal is based on one of the ρ control pairs, and the chrono value associated with the one described in the control pair is based on the "" shouting method includes: generating a residual controllable device peak It is difficult to predict that the controllable small program planning data includes a timing value and a power level value of up to Ϊμ, a force rate signal; and transmitting to the controllable device according to the periodic power signal=upper number; And, by selectively, at least the fine-grained power signal between the zero-crossing points of the periodic power signal includes: at least one riding the tactile signal at the zero-crossing point, according to the (four) control The method of generating the process in the parameter further comprises: finely consuming the current consumed by the controllable device, and decoding the consumed data as data received from the controllable device. Receiving: selectively outputting a specification of the data received by the control device in the non-transmission_=================================================================== And at least one of the power level values of 28 200835882. The method further comprises: receiving the output power signal, and detecting the signal of the wheeled power signal between zero crossings of the output power signal Decoding at least one of amplitude and power levels to decode the programming material in the output power signal. The method further comprising: generating a control signal based on the programming data, according to the control poor material And generating a control signal, and adjusting, according to the output power signal and the signal, for transmitting the signal, wherein the method further comprises setting the load power signal to a down value, and turning on And a value of the cutoff value. The method further comprises: timing the at least one period according to the control data, and generating the control nickname according to the at least one period.

所述方法更包括:將在所述過零點之間的所述信號振幅和所述功率位 準的至少一個與預定值相比較。所述方法更包括儲存p個控制對,其中每 個控制對包括功率位準值和計時值,其中,P是大於零的整數。所述^法更 ^括:依據所述p個控制對之一産生所述控制信號,並且在與所述p控制 信號中該有關的計時值過去後,依據所述P個控制對的另一個而産生 控制信號。 一種安裝程式規劃器包括:控制裝置,用於產生用於可控制裝置的程 式規劃資料,騎可㈣裝置難請的神雜,所難式規劃資料包 括計時值和神辦_至奴―;以及遺失脈衝傳送裝置,用於接收週 期功率信f,向職可控職置傳送依據所賴期鱗錄的輸出功率信 號,並且藉由在所述週期功率信號的過零點之間選擇性地縮減輸出功率^ 號振幅和功率位準的至少一個而在所述輸出功率信財編碼程式^ 劃貧料。 =述遺失脈衝傳送裝置气括關’該關包括:控制端,其與所述控 =,以及,第一端,其接收所述週期功率信號。所述開關包括三 ^元件1述關在過零點之_輸出辨信號中輸出近 絲程式規娜更包括者介雜置,躲接收乂個 輸之一 ’,、中,Μ是大於-的整數;以及參數控制裝置,用於儲 述Μ個輸入對應的咖程式規劃參數,其中,#啓動所述从一 29 200835882 時’所述控制裝置依據所述Μ個控制參數中對應的一個來產生所述程式規 劃資料。 所述女裝程式規劃器更包括接收裝置,其谓測由所述可控制裝置消耗 的電流,並且將所述電流消耗解碼為從所述可控制裝置接收的資料。所述 安裝程式規劃器更包括非揮發性記憶體。所述控制裝置在所述非揮發性記 憶體中儲存從所述可控制裝置接收的資料,並且根據在所述非揮發^記伊、 體中儲存的f料而選擇性地赴所述程式規難料。所述程式規劃資料包 括計時值和功率位準值的至少一對。 一種系統包括所述安裝程式規劃器,並且更包括所述可控制裝置❶所 述可控制裝置更包括遺失脈衝接收裝置’用於接收所述輸出功率信號,並籲 且藉由在所述触功率信制過零狀間翻所述輸出功率健的信號振 幅和功率辦的至少—個上的賴來_在輸㈣率信射的所 式規劃資料。 戶斤述可控制裝置更包括:控制裝置,用於儲存所述程式規劃資料,根 據所述程式觸資料來産生控制資料,並域據所述鋪資制産生控制 信號二以及裝置,其根據所述輸出功摊號和所述㈣信號而調整 ,於負,的負載解信號。所述_裝置包括:㈣端,其接收所述控制 ^ ’第ϋ接收所述輸出功率信號^所述觸裝置將所述 4吕號没定爲調降值、接通值和切斷值之一。 、 失脈衝触裝置將在所舰零狀Fa1騎雜號振幅與預定作 =幅相比較。所述遺失脈衝接收裝置將在所親零點之間的所述功率^ 準”預定功率位準她較。所述控織置包括計時模組,至少 時。所述程式規紐料包括所述至少—個計時_。所述_ 馆唬疋依據所述計時裝置的。 別 制裝置更包括參數儲存裝置,用於與所述控制模組相連,並 且f於儲存ρ個控制對’其中每個控制對包括功率位準值和計時值,其中 P疋大於零的整數。所述控制信號依據所述p雛制對之一,並且查在 所述P控制對中該有關的計時值過去後,依據所述p個控制對中的另 30 200835882 ,以=提供詳細說明,本發明應用之其他領域將為明顯。· 理解’此等詳細說贿特定娜然齡本發曝佳實補,其用竟: 目的僅為說明,而其用意並非在於限制本發明之範圍。 、 【實施方式】 ^由以下所提供詳細說明,應狀其他領域將為明顯。應當理解 坪細說明與特_雖然顯示本發明較佳實施例,其荨 而其用意並非在於限制本發日月。 ^The method further includes comparing at least one of the signal amplitude and the power level between the zero crossings to a predetermined value. The method further includes storing p control pairs, wherein each control pair includes a power level value and a timing value, wherein P is an integer greater than zero. The method further includes: generating the control signal according to one of the p control pairs, and after the timing value related to the p control signal passes, according to another one of the P control pairs And generate a control signal. An installer planner includes: a control device for generating program planning materials for the controllable device, a ridiculously accommodating device, and a difficult planning data including a timing value and a sneak-to-slave; a lost pulse transmitting device for receiving a periodic power signal f, the output control power signal according to the grading period of the job-oriented controllable position, and selectively reducing the output between the zero-crossing points of the periodic power signal At least one of the power amplitude and the power level is at least one of the output power signal encoding programs. = Description of the missing pulse transmitting device ??? The switch includes: a control terminal, which is associated with the control, and a first terminal that receives the periodic power signal. The switch includes three components 1 described in the zero-crossing point of the output signal, and the output of the near-wire program is even more mixed, and the receiving one is one of the integers, and the middle is an integer greater than - And a parameter control device for storing a corresponding coffee program planning parameter, wherein: #starting the operation from a 29 200835882, the control device generates a location according to a corresponding one of the control parameters Program planning information. The women's program planner further includes a receiving device that predicts current consumed by the controllable device and decodes the current consumption as data received from the controllable device. The installer planner further includes non-volatile memory. The control device stores the data received from the controllable device in the non-volatile memory, and selectively goes to the program according to the material stored in the non-volatile memory Unpredictable. The programming information includes at least one pair of timing values and power level values. A system includes the installer planner, and further comprising the controllable device, the controllable device further comprising a missing pulse receiving device 'for receiving the output power signal, and acknowledging by the touch power The signal-transformed zero-turning of the output power of the signal amplitude and power of at least one of the above-mentioned _ in the input (four) rate of the genre of planning information. The control device further includes: a control device for storing the program planning data, generating control data according to the program touch data, and generating a control signal 2 and a device according to the depositing system, according to the The output power distribution number and the (4) signal are adjusted, and the signal is decomposed at a negative load. The device includes: (4) end, which receives the control, and receives the output power signal. The touch device determines the 4 Lu number as a down value, an on value, and a cut value. One. The loss-of-pulse device will compare the amplitude of the zero-shaped Fa1 rider on the ship to the predetermined frame. The lost pulse receiving device compares the power level between the intimate points to a predetermined power level. The control weaving includes a timing module, at least when the program is included. a timing _. The _ 唬疋 唬疋 according to the timing device. The singular device further includes a parameter storage device for connecting to the control module, and f is stored in each of the control pairs And an integer comprising a power level value and a timing value, wherein P 疋 is greater than zero. The control signal is in accordance with one of the pair of p pairs, and after checking that the relevant timing value in the P control pair has passed, Another 30 of the p control pairs, 200835882, to provide a detailed description, the other areas of application of the present invention will be obvious. · Understand that 'this detailed description of the bribe specific Naran age this hair exposure good complement, its use The purpose of the invention is not to limit the scope of the invention. [Embodiment] The following detailed description is provided, and other fields will be apparent. It should be understood that Better implementation , Which is not intended by Qian and its sun and the moon to limit the invention. ^

本發明由以下詳細說明與所附圖式而更完整的理解。 以下說明僅為典紐質,且其用並不在於限制本發明、其應用 為了清楚起見’在此等圖中使用相同之參考號碼,以辨識類似树 。 在此所使用之片語A、B、以及C中的至少一個應當應當被認為是使= 斥邏輯或的邏輯(A或B或C)。應當理解,在一種方法中之步驟可2 不同的順序執行,而不會改變本發明之原理。 文 在此使用的術語“模組”表示專用積體電路(ASIC)、電子電路、用 執行-個或更多個軟體餘體程式的處理器(制、專用、或組群)與^ 憶體、組合邏輯電路及/或提供所述功能的其他適當零件。 ^ ° 現在參考第2圖,提供了典範電氣照明系統的功能方塊圖。服務面板 202經由電氣分配線2〇3與開關2〇4相連。開關2〇4可以是牆壁開關、切換 (toggle)開關、搖臂式開關、調降器⑺^㈤開關或任何其他適當的 開關。開關204控制到燈具206的功率流量。可控制燈泡2〇8與燈具胃2〇6 相連。 ^ 丄所述可控制燈泡208可以包括用於接收控制信號的接收器。所述控制 L號了以包括級由電氣分配線203接收的有線信號、及/或經由射頻(jyp) 廣播而接收的無線信號。這些控制信號可以指令所述可控制燈泡2⑽縮減 或增加光輸出。 在各種實現方式中,可控制燈泡208可以包括計時器,該計時器在預 定時間後關燈。計時器的期間可以在製造時被程式規劃,在安裝時被設定, 31 200835882 及/或一旦被安裝則被使用者修改。如下更詳細所述,使用者可以藉由傳送 控制信號(諸如使用電力線傳送器及/或射頻(RF)傳送器)及/或藉由調整 開關204而修改計時器的操作。 藉由使用可控制燈泡208而不是標準燈泡,可以自動化燈具2〇6的操 作,而不需要電工來更換開關204。由可控制燈泡提供的自動化的級別可以 包括計時的燈切斷、全屋燈切斷、電腦控制的照明控制及/或網路可存取的 照明控制。本發明的原理在包含三路或四路開關的組態中同樣運作良好。 現在參考第3圖,其提供另一個典範電子照明系統的功能方塊圖。電 力線載體控制模組250與電氣分配線203或與服務面板202相連的另一條 電氣分配線(未示出)相連。所述電力線載體控制模組25〇將控制信號重 疊在電氣分配線203上。可控制燈泡252經由開關204和燈具200來接收 控制信號。The invention will be more fully understood from the following detailed description. The following description is intended to be exemplary only, and is not intended to limit the invention, its application, for clarity, the same reference numerals are used in the drawings to identify similar trees. At least one of the phrases A, B, and C used herein should be considered to be logical (A or B or C) that makes = logical OR. It should be understood that the steps in one method may be performed in a different order without altering the principles of the invention. The term "module" as used herein refers to a dedicated integrated circuit (ASIC), an electronic circuit, a processor (system, dedicated, or group) that executes one or more software residues, and a memory. , combinatorial logic circuits and/or other suitable components that provide the described functionality. ^ ° Referring now to Figure 2, a functional block diagram of a typical electrical lighting system is provided. The service panel 202 is connected to the switch 2〇4 via an electrical distribution line 2〇3. Switch 2〇4 can be a wall switch, a toggle switch, a rocker switch, a down regulator (7), a switch, or any other suitable switch. Switch 204 controls the power flow to luminaire 206. The control bulb 2〇8 is connected to the lamp stomach 2〇6. ^ The controllable light bulb 208 can include a receiver for receiving control signals. The control L number includes a wired signal received by the level by the electrical distribution line 203, and/or a wireless signal received via a radio frequency (jyp) broadcast. These control signals can instruct the controllable light bulb 2 (10) to reduce or increase the light output. In various implementations, the controllable light bulb 208 can include a timer that turns off the light after a predetermined time. The period of the timer can be programmed by the program at the time of manufacture, set at the time of installation, 31 200835882 and/or modified by the user once installed. As described in greater detail below, the user can modify the operation of the timer by transmitting control signals, such as using power line transmitters and/or radio frequency (RF) transmitters, and/or by adjusting switch 204. By using the controllable bulb 208 instead of the standard bulb, the operation of the fixture 2〇6 can be automated without the need for an electrician to replace the switch 204. The level of automation provided by the controllable light bulb may include timed light cuts, full house light cuts, computer controlled lighting controls, and/or network accessible lighting controls. The principles of the present invention also work well in configurations involving three or four way switches. Referring now to Figure 3, there is provided a functional block diagram of another exemplary electronic lighting system. The power line carrier control module 250 is coupled to an electrical distribution line 203 or another electrical distribution line (not shown) that is coupled to the service panel 202. The power line carrier control module 25 重 overlays the control signals on the electrical distribution line 203. The controllable light bulb 252 receives control signals via the switch 204 and the luminaire 200.

電力線載體控制模組250可以包括使用者介面,該使用者介面允許使 用者增加或縮減從一個或更多個光源(諸如可控制燈泡252)輸出的光。電 力線載體控制模組250還可以與行動裝置254通信,所述行動裝置254諸 如是膝上型電腦、個人數位助理(PDA)、及/或行動電話。行動裝置254 可以經由有線或無線網路(諸如有線乙太網路)或無線介面(諸如正EE 802.Π、802.11a、802.11b、802.11g、802.11h、802·11η、802.16、802.20、 及/或藍牙)向電力線載體控制模組250傳送照明命令。 現在參考第4圖,其提供另一個典範電子照明系統的功能方塊圖。服 務面板202經由電氣分配線203與開關204相連。開關204與可控制燈具 300相連。燈泡302與可控制燈具3〇〇相連。所述可控制燈具3〇〇允許控制 光輸出,而不需要手工啓動開關204。 一旦將傳統的燈具替換為可控制燈具3〇〇,則可以使用諸如燈泡3〇2的 標準燈泡。燈泡302和可控制燈泡208和252可以包括白熾的、螢光的、 發光二極體的、及/或其他適當的光産生元件。 現在參考第5圖,其提供了另一個典範電子照明系統的功能方塊圖。 為了清楚目的’使用來自第2圖和第4圖的附圖標號來識別類似的零件。 32 200835882 服務面板202經由電氣分配線203與開關204相連。 開關204與燈具206相連。可控制調整器350被安裝在燈具206和燈 泡302之間。例如,可控制調整器350可以包括:突出部分,其與燈具206 接合;凹進部分,其與燈泡302接合。開關204和燈具206都不必被更換。 此外’可以使用標準燈泡,諸如燈泡302。 現在參考第6圖,其提供典範可控制燈泡4〇〇的功能方塊圖。可控制 燈泡400 (其可以被用作第2圖的可控制燈泡208)包括光產生元件402、 控制斋404和電子開關406。光産生元件402可以包括燈絲,諸如在鹵素燈 泡或白熾燈泡中的燈絲。光產生元件4〇2也可以包括螢光燈泡及/或小型螢 光燈泡,並且可以包括内建的鎮流器。 光產生元件402可以包括一個或更多個發光二極體(LED)。光產生 元件402及/或可控制燈泡4〇〇的其他零件可以被包圍在半透明殼體4〇8 中’所述半透明殼體408可以是密封的,並且可以由諸如玻璃及/或塑膠的 材料製成。控制器404可以經由第一和第二供應線或導體傳送功率。 例如,第一和第二供應線可以提供電力和接地、第一和第二線電壓(諸 如在三相系統中的線電壓)及/或其他適當的電源及/或參考電位。在各種實 現方式中,可控制燈泡400可以具有:導電的陽螺紋,其與所述第一和第 二供應線之一相連;以及導電尖端,其與所述第一和第二供應線的另一個 相連。 控制器404産生用於電氣開關406的控制信號,如同以下更詳細說明。 根據所述控制信號,電子關406選擇性地允許來自第一供應線的電流流 向光産生元件402。以替代方式,電子開關4〇6可設置於光産生元件4〇2的 另-側上’並且選擇性地允許電流流過所述第二供應、線。在各種實現方式 中,電子開Μ 406可以包括功率電晶體、三端雙向可控石夕開關元件、 矽整流器(SCR)、或某些其他適當的裝置。 工 電子關4G6可以包括調降(dimming)功能。例如,根據所述控制作 號,電子開關406可以縮減電壓,改變波形,及/或改變被提供到光產生元 件的電力的鮮。電子開關406可以包括開關電路,該開關電路在^電源 33 200835882 信號的每個周期的複數個部分期間切斷以提供調降。電子開關406可以包 括用於産生DC功率的整流器,並且可以包括用於降低電壓的直流到直流變 換器。電子開關406可以包括波形整形模組,其改變AC電源信號的波形以 提供調降。 來自控制器404的控制信號可以包括:數位信號,該數位信號從高向 低或從低向高轉變以指令電子開關防止電流通過光産生元件4〇2。所述控制 #號可以包括對應於要由電子開關406産生的調降量的類比信號。所述類 比信號可以從數位高電壓或數位低電壓之一向所述數位高電壓和低電壓的 另一個改變。所述類比信號的一個極端值可以對應於被切斷的光産生元件 402,而另一個極值可以對應於完全接通的光産生元件4〇2。 現在參考第7圖,其提供了典範可控制調整器45〇的功能方塊圖。可 控制調整器450 (其可以被用作第5圖中的可控制調整器35〇)包括控制器 452和電子開關454。控制器452與第一供應線和第二供應線相連。控制器 452向電子開關454提供控制信號。所述電子開關454根據所述控制信號而 選擇性地中k/f所述第一供應線。在切換的第一供應線及/或第二供應線上的 信號被可控制調整器450輸出到光産生元件(未示出)。 現在參考第8圖,其提供了典範可控制燈具5〇〇的功能方塊圖。所述 可控制燈具500 (其可以被用作第4圖的可控制燈具3〇〇)包括控制器5〇2 和電子關504。控制器502可以從第一和第二供應、線接收功率。控制器 502可以與第二供應線相連。 控制益502産生控制信號,該控制信號被輸出到電子開關5〇4。根據所 ,控制信號,所述電子關504選擇性地中斷在第一供應線上流動的電流。 第一及/或弟一供應線選擇性地由可控制燈具500連接到燈泡(未示出)。 現在參考第9圖至第18圖,其顯示典範控制器,諸如在第6圖至第8 圖的可控制燈泡_、可控制調整器45〇和可控制燈具中使用的控制 益。在第9圖中,提供了典範控制器55〇的功能方塊圖。控制器55〇包括 计時斋552。計時器552經由第一和第二供應線來接收功率。計時器5幻可 以包括内部電源(未示出),用於將來自第一和第二供應線的電壓轉換為 34 200835882 對於運算元字邏輯適合的電壓。 计時器552當其接收到功率時(諸如當接通手工燈開關時)可以開始 運行。、在運行時,計時器552施加(assert)第一控制信號,該第一控制信 號將電子開關引導到保持關閉(導通)。由所述電子開關控制的燈保持^ 通。一旦計時器達到預定計時值,則計時器552施加第二控制信號,該第 一控制信號指示電子開關應當切斷,這切斷了有關的燈。可以藉由暫時去 除電源,諸如猎由將手工燈開關切斷和接通來重設計時器552。 …現在參考第10圖,提供了另一個典範控制器_的功能方塊圖。控制 态60^包括電力線載體接收器6〇2,其經由第一和第二供應線而接收功率和 控制信號。輯職㈣鋪健,電力線絲概器麵性地輸出 控制信號以開啟和關閉電子開關。 所接收的控制彳5號可以包括分;5情應於用於開啟和關閉電子開關的輸 出控制信制縣接通和燈光靖信號。為了無絲載波接_ 6〇2通 信,可以諸如在製造時或在安裝_向電力線紐接收器6G2分配位址。 位址可以疋i體唯—的,或可以是在建築物内唯一的,以便定址控制 器600的命令可以特定地被編址到控制器600。 2配的位址可以被寫在控制的封裝上,以便可以將所分配的 到電力線載體控制模組中。所述電力線載體控制模組可以然 ίίΐ福糊控繼6GG特令。在各種實财射,電力線載體 舰觀財令《簡,錢許電力職體控讎 組例如切k/f在建梁物内的所有的燈。 哭=,提供了另一個典範控制器650的功能方塊圖。控制 二:Ϊ = 使用者輸入裝置654。使用者輸入裝置654可以包 =j度盤、按紐及/或其他裝置。使用者輸入裝置⑹決定計時器则 计時值。 §十¥斋652施加第一控制信號,吉糾、去$丨丄 ^ 璩直到達到由使用者輸入裝置054指示 的汁值。汁b守斋652然後施加第二批鈿产 一控制4唬。弟一和第二控制信號分別 將,子__閉和開啟。因此,由電子開關控制的燈保持接通,一 35 200835882 直到接收到第二控制信號為止。 使用者輸入裝置654還可以包括移動感測模組656。當在計時器652達 到計時值之前感測到移動時,使用者輸入裝置654可以增加計時值。所述 ,加可以是增加預定量,或可以與在已經達顺_個計時值之前的時間數 置有關。如果計時器652已經達到計時值,則使用者輸入裝置654可以藉 由重設計時器652而對所感測的移動做出回應,由此將燈再接通。 現在參考第12圖,其提供另一個典範控制器7〇〇的功能方塊圖。所述 控制器700包括:電力線載體接收器7〇2、和使用者輸入裝置(諸如變光開 關704)。龟力線載體接收器702經由第一和第二供應線來接收功率和控制 信號。 依據所接收的控制信號,電力線載體接收器7〇2指示電子開切開啟或 關閉。所述變光開關704決定電力線載體接收器7〇2的分配位址。以這種 方式,在建築物内的每個控制器700可以被分配不同的位址,這允許其對 特定編址的控制信號做出回應。 現在參考第13圖,其提供另一個典範控制器75〇的功能方塊圖。控制 器750包括計時器752和程式規劃模組754,它們從第一和第二供應線接收 功率。計時器752施加控制信號,所述控制信號一旦計時器752達到預定 計時值則引導電子開關斷開。 可以由程式規劃模組754來決定計時器752的預定值。程式規劃模組 754可以包括計時器752的初始值,該初始值可以藉由啓始程式規劃操作被 替換。為了啓始程式規劃操作,可以以預定方式來致動手工燈開關(諸如 第2圖的開關204)以啓始程式規劃模式。 僅舉例而言,可以在預定時間期間將所述開關接通和切斷預定次數。 燈可以閃売或閃滅、調降或以其他方式被調變來指示已經進入了程式規劃 模式。一旦已經進入了程式規劃模式,則可以以如下更詳細所述的方式來 接通或切斷燈開關,以程式規劃預定計時值。程式規劃模組754向計時模 組752輸出計時值,並且可以在非揮發性記憶體中儲存計時值。 現在參考第14圖,其提供了另一個典範控制器8〇〇的功能方塊圖。控 36 200835882 制器800包括電力線載體接收器802和程式規劃模組8〇4。電力線載體接收 器802從第—和第二電力線接收功率和控制信號。電力線載體接收器802 對於控制信號監控被引導到指定位址的命令。 、—與第13圖的程式規劃模組754 一樣,第14圖的程式規劃模組8〇4可 以藉由監控供應線上功率的開關來接收資料。依據功率開關的預定樣式, 程式規劃模組8G4可以啓始收聽模式。在收聽模式中,程式規劃模組8〇4 引導電力線载體接收器802來收聽經由電力線載體在第一和第二供應線上 廣播的位址。 ^ 電力線载體控制模組然後可以在第一和第二供應線上廣播包括位址的 訊息。電力線载體接收器802可以然後使用所接收的位址來作為其被分配 的位址,允許未來的命令具體定址到電力線載體接收器8〇2。對於在建築物 内的其他控制器重覆這個過程,由此向每個控制器分配唯一的位址。 在每個控制器被置於收聽模式中後,可以廣播對應的唯一位址。這些 唯:位址可以然後用於個別地控制控制器。以替代方式,功率開關的預定 樣式可以提供程式規劃模組804中的位址。電力線載體接收器8〇2可以然 後從程式規劃模組8〇4接收這個位址,並對被引導到這個位址的所接收的 命令做出回應。 現在參考第15圖,其提供了另一個典範控制器85〇的功能方塊圖。控 制器850包括電力線載體收發器852,並且可以包括非揮發性記憶體854。 電力線載體收發器852接收功率和控制信號,並且經由第一和第二供應線 傳送控制信號。 當電力線載髗收發器852在安裝後第一次接收到功率時,其可以經由 第一和第二供應線來傳送識別信號。與第一和第二電力線相連的電力線载 體控制模組(未示出)可以接收所述識別信號,並且以唯一位址回復。電 力線載體收發器852接收這個唯一位址,並且可以將其儲存在非揮發性記 憶體854中。電力線載體收發器852可以然後對承載所述唯一位址的訊息 做出回應。 以替代方式,電力線載體收發器852可以包括預先程式規劃的唯一位 37 200835882 址。在安裝後接收到功率時,電力線載體收發胃852可以在第一和第二供 應線上廣^個唯-的預先程式規_紐。所述電力線麵_模财 以然後使用這個位址來隨後與控制器85()通信。 當諸如控制H 85G的複數個控制njgj時接收到功树,它們可能壹試 ,時傳送。衝突侧可⑽止同時舰,但是唯一位址的分配可能^決 定的。為此,控制器可能需要被依序加電及/或程式規劃。 时現在參考第16圖,提供了另—個典範控制器_的功能方塊圖。控制 器900包括電力絲體收發^ 9〇2和程式規劃模組9〇4。電力線載體收發器 902經由第一和第二電力線來接收和傳送控制信號。 x w 程式賴模組9G4將在供應線上的功率的存在與不存在解譯爲指令。 程式規劃模組904向電力線載體收發器傳送依據這些指令的命令。所 逃程式規醜組904可軸電力線健收發器傳送伴隨有指定位址的 設定位址指令。電力線載體接收器9G2可以然後對被將職定位址的命 令做出回應。 、、,私式規劃模組9〇4也可以將傳送位址命令向電力線載體收發器9〇2傳 达。由電力線載體收發器902傳送的位址可以被與第一和第二供應線相連 的電力線__輸(未和)減。舰冑力_麵讎組可以然 後使用該位址向電力線載體收發器9〇2傳送訊息。 一所述程式規劃模組904也可以向電力線載體收發器9〇2傳送收聽命 令。程式規龍纟a 9G4可以然後制在廣播訊息巾接收的下—個位址來開 始。耘式規劃模組904也可以向電力線載體收發器9〇2傳送重設位址命令, 使得電力線載體收發器902將其位址重設到工廠内定值。 +這個工廠内定值可以是所述電力線載體控制模組所已知的,允許它與 包力線載體收發器9G2通信以執行初始的蚊。在初始毅結束時,電力 線載體控制模組可以向電力線載體收發器9〇2分配唯一位址。 現在參考第17圖,其提供了另一個典範控制器950的功能方塊圖。控 ,态950包括:計時器952、和唯讀記憶體(R0M) 954。可以在製造或安 衣%對ROM 954程式規劃。一旦被程式規劃,R〇M 954就向計時器952 38 200835882 提供計。計時器952可以與第13圖的計時模組752類似地運作。 現在參考第18圖’其提供了另,典範控腦㈣能方 ,述控㈣包括:電力線讎接㈣_、和唯讀記紐(顧)腦。 =腦=在觀絲辦齡錢純且喊力賴_收器臟 ϊίΓΓ i體接收器賺對承载由R〇M麵指定的位址的控制 ^虎做出回應。在建築物内的諸如控制器獅的複數健制器可以每個以 唯-位址來程式規細⑽職4力線賴接收器臟可餘第 的電力線載體接收器802類似地運作。 ’ t/9 ™ ’其提供了典縣式規舰組刪的魏方塊圖。The power line carrier control module 250 can include a user interface that allows a user to increase or decrease the light output from one or more light sources, such as the controllable light bulb 252. The power line carrier control module 250 can also be in communication with a mobile device 254, such as a laptop, a personal digital assistant (PDA), and/or a mobile phone. The mobile device 254 can be via a wired or wireless network (such as a wired Ethernet network) or a wireless interface (such as EE 802.Π, 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g, 802.11h, 802.11n, 802.16, 802.20, and / or Bluetooth) transmits lighting commands to the power line carrier control module 250. Referring now to Figure 4, there is provided a functional block diagram of another exemplary electronic lighting system. The service panel 202 is coupled to the switch 204 via an electrical distribution line 203. Switch 204 is coupled to controllable luminaire 300. The bulb 302 is connected to a controllable light fixture 3〇〇. The controllable light fixture 3〇〇 allows control of the light output without the need to manually activate the switch 204. Once the conventional luminaire is replaced with a controllable luminaire, a standard bulb such as the bulb 3〇2 can be used. Light bulb 302 and controllable light bulbs 208 and 252 can include incandescent, fluorescent, light emitting diodes, and/or other suitable light generating elements. Referring now to Figure 5, a functional block diagram of another exemplary electronic lighting system is provided. For the sake of clarity, the reference numerals from Figures 2 and 4 are used to identify similar parts. 32 200835882 Service panel 202 is coupled to switch 204 via electrical distribution line 203. Switch 204 is coupled to luminaire 206. A controllable adjuster 350 is mounted between the luminaire 206 and the bulb 302. For example, the controllable adjuster 350 can include a protruding portion that engages the light fixture 206 and a recessed portion that engages the light bulb 302. Both switch 204 and luminaire 206 need not be replaced. Further, a standard light bulb such as a bulb 302 can be used. Referring now to Figure 6, a functional block diagram of an exemplary controllable light bulb 4 is provided. A controllable light bulb 400 (which can be used as the controllable light bulb 208 of Figure 2) includes a light generating element 402, a control 404, and an electronic switch 406. Light generating element 402 can include a filament, such as a filament in a halogen bulb or an incandescent bulb. The light generating element 4〇2 may also include a fluorescent bulb and/or a compact fluorescent bulb, and may include a built-in ballast. Light generating component 402 can include one or more light emitting diodes (LEDs). The light generating element 402 and/or other parts that can control the bulb 4 can be enclosed in a translucent housing 4〇8. The translucent housing 408 can be sealed and can be made of, for example, glass and/or plastic. Made of materials. Controller 404 can transmit power via the first and second supply lines or conductors. For example, the first and second supply lines can provide power and ground, first and second line voltages (such as line voltages in a three-phase system), and/or other suitable power and/or reference potentials. In various implementations, the controllable light bulb 400 can have: a conductive male thread connected to one of the first and second supply lines; and a conductive tip that is coupled to the first and second supply lines One connected. Controller 404 generates control signals for electrical switch 406, as explained in more detail below. Electron shutoff 406 selectively allows current from the first supply line to flow to light generating element 402 in accordance with the control signal. Alternatively, the electronic switch 4〇6 may be disposed on the other side of the light generating element 4〇2 and selectively allow current to flow through the second supply, line. In various implementations, the electronic opening 406 can include a power transistor, a triac, a sigma rectifier (SCR), or some other suitable device. The electronic off 4G6 can include a dimming function. For example, depending on the control, electronic switch 406 can reduce the voltage, change the waveform, and/or change the power supplied to the light generating component. The electronic switch 406 can include a switching circuit that is turned off during a plurality of portions of each cycle of the power supply 33 200835882 to provide a down-conversion. Electronic switch 406 can include a rectifier for generating DC power and can include a DC to DC converter for reducing the voltage. Electronic switch 406 can include a waveform shaping module that changes the waveform of the AC power signal to provide a down-conversion. The control signal from controller 404 can include a digital signal that transitions from high to low or low to high to command an electronic switch to prevent current from passing through light generating element 4〇2. The control # number may include an analog signal corresponding to the amount of down regulation to be generated by the electronic switch 406. The analog signal can vary from one of a digital high voltage or a digital low voltage to another of the digital high voltage and low voltage. One extreme value of the analog signal may correspond to the cut light generating element 402, and the other extreme value may correspond to the fully turned light generating element 4〇2. Referring now to Figure 7, a functional block diagram of a model controllable adjuster 45A is provided. The controllable adjuster 450 (which can be used as the controllable adjuster 35A in Fig. 5) includes a controller 452 and an electronic switch 454. The controller 452 is connected to the first supply line and the second supply line. Controller 452 provides control signals to electronic switch 454. The electronic switch 454 selectively k/fs the first supply line in accordance with the control signal. The signals on the switched first supply line and/or the second supply line are output to the light generating element (not shown) by the controllable adjuster 450. Referring now to Figure 8, a functional block diagram of a typical controllable luminaire 5 is provided. The controllable luminaire 500 (which can be used as the controllable luminaire 3 of Figure 4) includes a controller 5〇2 and an electronic switch 504. Controller 502 can receive power from the first and second supplies, lines. Controller 502 can be coupled to the second supply line. Control benefit 502 generates a control signal that is output to electronic switch 5〇4. In accordance with the control signal, the electronic shutdown 504 selectively interrupts current flow on the first supply line. The first and/or the first supply line is selectively coupled to the light bulb (not shown) by the controllable light fixture 500. Referring now to Figures 9 through 18, there are shown exemplary controllers, such as controllable bulbs, controllable adjusters 45, and controllable luminaires used in controllable luminaires in Figures 6 through 8. In Fig. 9, a functional block diagram of the exemplary controller 55A is provided. The controller 55 includes a timing 552. The timer 552 receives power via the first and second supply lines. The timer 5 magic may include an internal power source (not shown) for converting the voltages from the first and second supply lines to 34 200835882 for a voltage suitable for the operation of the meta-word logic. The timer 552 can begin to run when it receives power, such as when the manual light switch is turned on. In operation, the timer 552 asserts a first control signal that directs the electronic switch to remain off (on). The lamp controlled by the electronic switch remains on. Once the timer reaches the predetermined timing value, the timer 552 applies a second control signal indicating that the electronic switch should be turned off, which cuts off the associated lamp. The timer 552 can be reset by temporarily removing the power source, such as hunting by turning the manual light switch off and on. ... Now with reference to Figure 10, a functional block diagram of another exemplary controller _ is provided. The control state 60^ includes a power line carrier receiver 〇2 that receives power and control signals via the first and second supply lines. In the post (4), the power line outputs a control signal to turn the electronic switch on and off. The received control number 5 may include a sub-section; 5 the output control signalling county signal for turning the electronic switch on and off. For wireless carrier connection, the address can be assigned to the power line receiver 6G2, such as at the time of manufacture or at installation. The address may be unique or may be unique within the building so that the commands of the addressing controller 600 may be specifically addressed to the controller 600. The 2 assigned address can be written on the control package so that it can be assigned to the power line carrier control module. The power line carrier control module can be followed by the 6GG special command. In all kinds of real financial, power line carrier ship view financial order "Jane, Qian Xu electric power control group, such as cut k / f all the lights in the building. Cry =, provides a functional block diagram of another exemplary controller 650. Control 2: Ϊ = user input device 654. User input device 654 can include a j-disc, button, and/or other device. The user input device (6) determines the timer value. §10¥ 652 applies the first control signal, 吉 、, goes to 丨丄 ^ 璩 until the juice value indicated by the user input device 054 is reached. Juice b shou 652 then apply a second batch of sputum production a control 4 唬. The first and second control signals will be closed and turned on. Therefore, the lamp controlled by the electronic switch remains on, a 35 200835882 until the second control signal is received. User input device 654 can also include a motion sensing module 656. The user input device 654 can increment the timing value when the movement is sensed before the timer 652 reaches the timing value. The addition may be an increase in the predetermined amount, or may be related to the number of times before the timing value has been reached. If the timer 652 has reached the timing value, the user input device 654 can respond to the sensed movement by resetting the timer 652, thereby turning the light back on. Referring now to Figure 12, a functional block diagram of another exemplary controller 7A is provided. The controller 700 includes a power line carrier receiver 〇2, and a user input device (such as a dimming switch 704). The turtle line carrier receiver 702 receives power and control signals via the first and second supply lines. Based on the received control signal, the power line carrier receiver 7〇2 indicates that the electronic cut-off is turned on or off. The dimmer switch 704 determines the assigned address of the power line carrier receiver 7〇2. In this manner, each controller 700 within a building can be assigned a different address, which allows it to respond to a particular addressed control signal. Referring now to Figure 13, a functional block diagram of another exemplary controller 75A is provided. Controller 750 includes a timer 752 and a program planning module 754 that receive power from the first and second supply lines. The timer 752 applies a control signal that directs the electronic switch to open once the timer 752 reaches a predetermined timing value. The predetermined value of the timer 752 can be determined by the program planning module 754. The program planning module 754 can include an initial value of the timer 752 that can be replaced by a start program planning operation. To initiate the program planning operation, a manual light switch (such as switch 204 of Figure 2) can be actuated in a predetermined manner to initiate the programming mode. For example only, the switch may be turned "on" and "off" a predetermined number of times during a predetermined time period. The light can be flashed or flashed, down, or otherwise modulated to indicate that program programming mode has been entered. Once the programming mode has been entered, the light switch can be turned "on" or "off" in a manner described in more detail below to program a predetermined timing value. The programming module 754 outputs timing values to the timing module 752 and can store timing values in non-volatile memory. Referring now to Figure 14, a functional block diagram of another exemplary controller 8A is provided. Control 36 200835882 The controller 800 includes a power line carrier receiver 802 and a program planning module 8〇4. Power line carrier receiver 802 receives power and control signals from the first and second power lines. The power line carrier receiver 802 monitors the commands that are directed to the designated address for the control signals. - Like the programming module 754 of Figure 13, the programming module 8〇4 of Figure 14 can receive data by monitoring the power on the supply line. Depending on the predetermined style of the power switch, the programming module 8G4 can initiate the listening mode. In the listening mode, the programming module 8〇4 directs the power line carrier receiver 802 to listen to the addresses broadcast on the first and second supply lines via the power line carrier. ^ The power line carrier control module can then broadcast a message including the address on the first and second supply lines. The power line carrier receiver 802 can then use the received address as its assigned address, allowing future commands to be specifically addressed to the power line carrier receiver 8〇2. This process is repeated for other controllers within the building, thereby assigning each controller a unique address. After each controller is placed in the listening mode, the corresponding unique address can be broadcast. These only: the address can then be used to individually control the controller. Alternatively, the predetermined pattern of power switches can provide the address in the programming module 804. The power line carrier receiver 8〇2 can then receive the address from the programming module 8〇4 and respond to the received command directed to the address. Referring now to Figure 15, a functional block diagram of another exemplary controller 85A is provided. Controller 850 includes a power line carrier transceiver 852 and may include non-volatile memory 854. The power line carrier transceiver 852 receives power and control signals and transmits control signals via the first and second supply lines. When the power line carrier transceiver 852 receives power for the first time after installation, it can transmit an identification signal via the first and second supply lines. A power line carrier control module (not shown) coupled to the first and second power lines can receive the identification signal and reply with a unique address. The power line carrier transceiver 852 receives this unique address and can store it in the non-volatile memory 854. The power line carrier transceiver 852 can then respond to the message carrying the unique address. Alternatively, the power line carrier transceiver 852 can include a pre-programmed unique bit 37 200835882. When power is received after installation, the power line carrier transceiver stomach 852 can be widely pre-programmed on the first and second supply lines. The power line face is then used to subsequently communicate with controller 85(). When a function tree such as a plurality of controls njgj that controls H 85G is received, they may be tried and transmitted. The conflict side can (10) stop the ship at the same time, but the allocation of the unique address may be determined. To this end, the controller may need to be powered up sequentially and/or programmed. Referring now to Figure 16, a functional block diagram of another exemplary controller is provided. The controller 900 includes a power wire transceiver 9 and a program planning module 9〇4. The power line carrier transceiver 902 receives and transmits control signals via the first and second power lines. The xw program Lai module 9G4 interprets the presence and absence of power on the supply line as instructions. The programming module 904 transmits commands in accordance with these instructions to the power line carrier transceiver. The escaped program ugly group 904 can transmit the set address command accompanied by the specified address. The power line carrier receiver 9G2 can then respond to the command of the job location. The private planning module 9〇4 can also transmit the transmission address command to the power line carrier transceiver 9〇2. The address transmitted by the power line carrier transceiver 902 can be subtracted from the power line __ (not sum) connected to the first and second supply lines. The ship _ 雠 雠 group can then use this address to transmit a message to the power line carrier transceiver 9 〇 2 . A program planning module 904 can also transmit a listening command to the power line carrier transceiver 〇2. The program ruler 9G4 can then be started at the next address received by the broadcast message towel. The rake planning module 904 can also transmit a reset address command to the power line carrier transceiver 〇2 such that the power line carrier transceiver 902 resets its address to a factory default. + This factory default value can be known to the power line carrier control module, allowing it to communicate with the power line carrier transceiver 9G2 to perform the initial mosquito. At the end of the initial phase, the power line carrier control module can assign a unique address to the power line carrier transceiver 9〇2. Referring now to Figure 17, a functional block diagram of another exemplary controller 950 is provided. The control 950 includes a timer 952 and a read only memory (ROM) 954. You can plan on the ROM 954 program in manufacturing or installation. Once programmed, R〇M 954 provides the meter to 952 38 200835882. The timer 952 can operate similarly to the timing module 752 of FIG. Referring now to Figure 18, which provides another model, the brain control (four) energy, the control (four) includes: power line connection (four) _, and only read the New Zealand (Gu) brain. = brain = in the view of the silk age and pure and shouting force _ _ _ _ _ _ ΓΓ ΓΓ ΓΓ 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体 体A plurality of controllers, such as controller lions, within the building can each operate similarly with a unique address-based power line carrier receiver 802. 't/9 TM ' provides a Wei block diagram of the Dianxian-style ship fleet.

ΐϊϊΐ=5ί?括電源1052 ’其向程式規劃模組1050的零件提供功 式規組_更包括:計時模組1G56、微控制器 揮發性記憶體1060。 F 猎由使闕驗供和絲辨麵程式賴做傳送資料。 向^簡觀獅触辨時,魏難無缺供神。電細j模 儲存電能’並且當去除功率時向計時難祕和微控制器顧 ⑽。#時权組1056可以用於監控存在功率的時間長度和去除功率 的日Τ間長度。這個資訊用於程式規劃可控制燈泡、燈具或調整器的操作。 微控彻刪從計時敎咖接㈣轉在和林在_,並且將 它們解譯麟令。電概存模組鶴儲存賴的電荷:對計時模组腦 和微控制器娜㈣達程式簡_去除神的最長麟期間。、,、 刪t時間期間Ϊ除功率時,諸如當在夜間手工關燈時,電荷儲存模組 喪失足夠的電何以致於計時模組娜和微控制器刪停止操作。這 =有問題,因為計時模組娜和微控制器刪僅需要當進行程式規劃 。微控制器1058在非揮發性記憶體1060中儲存程式璧眘訊以 準備功率被去除延長的期間。 現在參考第20圖’其提供了另—個典餘式規繼組聰的功能方 塊,:所雜式賴敝聽包括電源難,其對電荷儲存模組蘭、 计犄杈組1104、微控制器1106和非揮發性記憶體11〇8進行供電。 39 200835882 田從电源1〇52去除功率時’電荷儲存模組11〇2對計時模組·供電。 伯了供^ ’舰控制器UG6讀取計時模組1104的值,並且將所述 值,存到雜發性記舰刪t。叹種对,健繼蘭可以決定 何%再次接通供電,而不用對自己供電。 3為了決定供電被去除多長時間,微控制器在去除供電之前向非揮發性 義體1108 t儲存物值。因為一旦去除了供電則微控制器聰可能沒 有足夠的_來記料雜,目此微控彻聰可卩轉在供冑時週期地 儲存計時值。可以然後從被寫入到非揮發性記憶體的最後的計時值、 和當恢復供電時存在料雜’以較轉轉在的近似長度。 現在參考第21 ® ’其提供了聽描述轉提供存在和林在序列及其 有關的指令的典範表格。程式規雛組(諸如帛19 _程式規觸組奶〇 或第20圖的程式規纖組1100)可以接收依據功率被去除(切斷周期)的 次數的資料。可以使用手工燈開關來提供這個資料。 當開關接通(導電)時,程式賴模組經歷接通觸。當關切斷(不 導電)時,程式規劃模組經歷切斷周期。當使用典範表格1152時,程式規 劃模組經歷的依序切斷周期的數量決定程式規劃模組應當執行的功能。為 了保護防止無意間的程式規劃,程式規劃模組可以不對切斷周期進行計 數,一直到應用程式規劃啓動序列為止。在第22圖中提供了典範程式規割 啓動序列。 i 在表格1152中,保留了單個切斷周期的情況,以進一步保護防止無意 間的程式規劃。兩個切斷周期的序列指示程式規劃模組命令電力線載體收 發益傳送其識別碼。二個切斷周期的序列對應於更新識別碼指令。這個指 令命令電力線載體接收器/收發器將其目前的識別碼替換為藉由電力線載體 接收的下一識別碼。 所述電力線載體接收器/收發器可以在預定時間期間後停止收聽替換識 別碼。可以對應於數個切斷周期的另一個指令是廣播連接指令。這個指令 使得電力線載體收發器廣播用於顯示所述電力線載體收發器的訊φ、。電力 線載體收發器可以然後收聽要由電力線載體控制模組傳送的新的位址。四 200835882 個=斷周_序_應於重設酬碼指令’其中,命 將其識別碼重設為工廠内定值。 力、裏戰篮接收 ,表格1154提供適合於計時器的典範指令。可以保留單個切斷周期序 序列可以指示計時器應當被設定為5分鐘,因此在5Ϊ́ϊϊΐ=5ί? includes a power supply 1052' which provides a power gauge to the components of the programming module 1050. _ further includes a timing module 1G56 and a microcontroller volatile memory 1060. F Hunting is used to transmit data by means of a test and a silk-faced program. When the lion is touched, the Wei is indispensable for God. The electric j-mode stores the electrical energy' and when it is removed, it is difficult to clock and the microcontroller (10). The time weight group 1056 can be used to monitor the length of time in which power is present and the length of time between power removals. This information is used in program planning to control the operation of the lamp, fixture or adjuster. The micro-control is completely deleted from the timing 敎 接 (4) and the Lin _, and they are interpreted. The electric storage module crane stores the charge: the timing module brain and the microcontroller Na (four) up to the simple _ _ remove the god of the longest period. When the power is removed during the t-time, such as when the lights are manually turned off at night, the charge storage module loses enough power so that the timing module and the microcontroller delete the operation. This = there is a problem, because the timing module Na and the microcontroller are deleted only when planning the program. The microcontroller 1058 stores a program in the non-volatile memory 1060 to prepare for a period in which the power is removed for an extended period of time. Referring now to Figure 20, it provides another functional block of the continuation of the continuation of the group: the miscellaneous type of 敝 敝 listening includes the power supply, its charge storage module blue, the meter group 1104, micro-control The device 1106 and the non-volatile memory 11〇8 supply power. 39 200835882 When Tian Cong Power 1〇52 removes power, the charge storage module 11〇2 supplies power to the timing module. The ship controller UG6 reads the value of the timing module 1104 and saves the value to the miscellaneous ship. With the sigh, Jian Jilan can decide what % is connected to the power supply instead of powering himself. 3 In order to determine how long the power supply is removed, the microcontroller stores the value to the non-volatile body 1108 t before removing the power supply. Because once the power supply is removed, the microcontroller Cong may not have enough _ to record the miscellaneous, so that the micro-control can be used to periodically store the timing value during the supply. It can then be from the last timing value written to the non-volatile memory, and the approximate length at which the material miscellaneous turns when the power is restored. Reference is now made to Section 21®' which provides a model table that provides a description of the existence and forest instructions in the sequence and its related instructions. The program group (such as the 帛 19 _ program gauge group milk or the program group 1100 of Fig. 20) can receive data on the number of times the power is removed (cut cycle). A manual light switch can be used to provide this information. When the switch is turned on (conducting), the program is subjected to a touch-on. When off (non-conducting), the programming module experiences a cut-off period. When the canonical form 1152 is used, the number of sequential cut cycles experienced by the program planning module determines the functions that the programming module should perform. To protect against unintentional programming, the programming module can count the cutoff cycle until the application plans the startup sequence. An exemplary program-cutting start sequence is provided in Figure 22. i In Table 1152, a single cut-off period is preserved to further protect against unintentional programming. The sequence of two cut-off periods instructs the programming module to command the power line carrier to transmit its identification code. The sequence of two cut cycles corresponds to the update identification code command. This command instructs the power line carrier receiver/transceiver to replace its current identification code with the next identification code received by the power line carrier. The power line carrier receiver/transceiver may stop listening to the replacement identification code after a predetermined period of time. Another instruction that may correspond to several cut cycles is a broadcast connection instruction. This command causes the power line carrier transceiver to broadcast a signal φ for displaying the power line carrier transceiver. The power line carrier transceiver can then listen to the new address to be transmitted by the power line carrier control module. Four 200835882 = break week_order_ should be reset the code command', in which the code is reset to the factory default. Force and Lane Basket Reception, Table 1154 provides exemplary instructions for the timer. A single cut-off sequence can be kept. The sequence can indicate that the timer should be set to 5 minutes, so at 5

%曰1長又、5、6、7、8、9和1G個切__序 分鐘、3G分鐘,分鐘,分鐘、1小時七小時和H 蘭力線載敝發器和接收_典範齡。在表格 广::列(它們用於向程式規劃模組傳送指令)類似於Μ㈣ 對切斷周_數量的計數,開職環接 猶環開關對應於第二二進位狀態,如在表格1160中的 獅糊_撕。__作可以 直J對應於—她數字位,並且可以直 116G 咖,狀相令 環動::=rrr環動作、後隨短循環動作、最後是長循 短、長、短可以龍於重對應於更新識觸指令,而長、 导、i格具U6Li含適合树時騎序列—至—指令映射。可以保留序列 ^供未來使用。序列長、長、長、短可以對應於5分鐘 2 °序長、短、長可以對應於1G分鐘。在本_中,立他 的一進位序列可以對應於多至2小時的計時長度。 八 另-個典範程式規劃技術涉及週期取樣。一 销定期隨控功率狀態。縣個周二二=規 ^所、在裤。這_轉餅龍糾個二進位數 子所述屬例如可以是5秒。為了允許更快的程式規劃,所述期間可以 200835882 更短,諸如一秒或〇·5秒。表格1170包含從所測量的二進位數字之程式規 劃模組功能的典範映射。 可以保留1〇1〇的序列以供未來使用。〇η〇的序列可以對應於傳送識別 碼指令。1001和0101的序列可以分別對應於更新識別碼和重設識別碼指 令。表格1172包含適合於計時器的類似典範映射。可以保留序列〇⑻〇以 供未來使用。序列0001可以對應於5分鐘的計時值。⑻1〇的序列可以對應 於10分鐘的計時值等,一直到用於2小時的100〗的序列為止。 程式規劃序列還可以提供調降指令。例如,程式規劃序列可以對應於 不同的調降位準。可以在-個程式規劃操作中設定瓣位準,而在[個 程式規劃操作中設定_。以替代方式,在程式__,可以對燈進行 強度的逐漸增加或降低,當其達到誠位準時,可以切斷手卫燈開關。當 隨後再次接通燈開關時,可以恢復這個燈強度。 現在參考f 22目,流程關述了由使用者在啓動程式賴模組中的程 式規劃時執行的典範步驟。控制在步驟i中開始,其中,可控制的光源 通大於諸如5分鐘的預定時間期間。這個時間數量允^電荷儲^ 換减存足夠的電荷,以在其中光源將被切斷的程式規劃操作期間供電。 為了 3=/繼續,其中,絲被峨縱_,諸如2秒鐘。 為了允歧用者可祕,可以有容錯,諸如接受在!至 控制在步驟削令繼續’其中,光源被切換而接通。在步驟待 -秒後,控制在步驟12〇8中繼續,其中,使用者二 2 =將絲鱗2神在_2_丨 在步驟1208令,使用者在諸如1〇秒的預定時間期 否則,程式賴模組將假定實際上不賊程式賊 i =、二 者迅速地關掉燈然後接通燈達指定次數。這 =121^中,使用 ㈣_獅斷周期。在烟212中,在開和 。此處,切二^的計數停止且控制結 42 200835882 現在參考帛23 ® ’触圖綱喊規醜_典範操作,帛 弟22圖中所指定的使用者程式規劃輸入。控制在步驟13〇〇中開始,发° 控制決定是否燈接通。如果否,驗制保持在步驟㈣巾;否則° 移到步驟13G2。在步驟13GG中’當在首次向電路供電制始 ^ 可能發現燈是接通的。 π &制 在步驟1302 ’重設計時器以允許它監控燈被接通的時間數量。 步驟13〇4繼續,其中’控制決定是否燈切斷。-旦燈被靖,則控 到步驟1306 ;否則,保持在步驟1304令。在步驟13〇6中, : 分鐘的值相比較。 如果計時器的值大於5分鐘(這指示燈至少接通5分鐘),則 3簡繼續;酬’測返_步驟13⑻。這個等待_確保電荷儲存 具有足_電荷,並且祕護防止無賴啓動程式規劃。在步驟聰 中,計時器被重設以監控燈被切斷的期間。 f步驟測巾,㈣決定是紐被紐…旦雜通,顺制轉移到 v驟1312 ;否則’控制保持在步驟中。在步驟i3i2中,將計時哭盘%曰1 long, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 1G cuts __ minutes, 3G minutes, minutes, minutes, 1 hour and 7 hours and H lan line loader and receiver _ 典 龄. In the Table Wide:: column (they are used to transfer instructions to the programming module) is similar to Μ(4) Counting the number of cut-off weeks, the opening loop is connected to the second-loop state, as in Table 1160. Lion paste _ tear. __ can be straight J corresponds to - her digital position, and can be straight 116G coffee, the shape of the ring to move:: = rrr ring action, followed by short cycle action, the last is long cycle short, long, short can be heavy Corresponding to the update of the instruction, the long, derivative, and U6Li contain the sequence-to-instruction mapping for the tree. The sequence can be retained for future use. The sequence length, length, length, and length can correspond to 5 minutes. 2 ° The sequence length, length, and length can correspond to 1G minutes. In this _, a carry sequence can correspond to a chronograph length of up to 2 hours. Eight Another-parameter programming technique involves periodic sampling. A regular sales power state is sold. The county is Tuesday 2 = regulations, in the pants. This _ turn cake dragon can correct the binary digits, for example, the genus can be 5 seconds. To allow for faster program planning, the period can be shorter than 200835882, such as one second or five seconds. Table 1170 contains a generic map of the functionality of the program planning module from the measured binary digits. A sequence of 1〇1〇 can be reserved for future use. The sequence of 〇η〇 may correspond to a transmission identification code instruction. The sequences of 1001 and 0101 may correspond to the update identification code and the reset identification code command, respectively. Table 1172 contains a similar canonical map suitable for a timer. The sequence 〇(8) can be retained for future use. Sequence 0001 can correspond to a 5 minute timing value. The sequence of (8) 1 可以 may correspond to a time value of 10 minutes or the like until the sequence of 100 〗 for 2 hours. The program planning sequence can also provide a down command. For example, the programming sequence can correspond to different downgrade levels. The valve level can be set in a program planning operation and set to _ in [programming operation]. Alternatively, in the program __, the intensity of the lamp can be gradually increased or decreased, and when it reaches the honest level, the hand light switch can be turned off. This lamp intensity can be restored when the light switch is subsequently turned on again. Referring now to Figure 22, the process details the exemplary steps performed by the user in the programming of the launcher module. Control begins in step i, wherein the controllable light source is greater than a predetermined time period such as 5 minutes. This amount of time allows the charge to be stored and replaced with sufficient charge to power during the program planning operation in which the source will be cut. For 3 = / continue, where the wire is indulged _, such as 2 seconds. In order to allow the user to be secret, there can be fault tolerance, such as accepting! The control is continued in the step of cutting, wherein the light source is switched on and turned on. After the step-to-second, control continues in step 12〇8, where the user 2 == the scale 2 is in the _2_丨 in step 1208, the user is in a predetermined time period such as 1 〇 second otherwise The program will assume that the thief program is not actually thief i =, the two quickly turn off the lights and then turn on the lights for a specified number of times. This =121^, using (four) _ lion break cycle. In the smoke 212, it is on and off. Here, the count of the cut is stopped and the control is terminated. 42 200835882 Now refer to the user program planning input specified in Figure 22 of the 帛23 ® ‘Touch Diagram 喊 _ 典 典 典 典. Control begins in step 13 and the control determines whether the light is on. If not, the inspection remains in step (4); otherwise, ° moves to step 13G2. In step 13GG, 'When power is first supplied to the circuit ^, it may be found that the lamp is on. The π & system resets the timer at step 1302 to allow it to monitor the amount of time the light is turned "on". Step 13〇4 continues, where the 'control determines if the light is turned off. Once the lamp is on, control is passed to step 1306; otherwise, it is maintained in step 1304. In step 13〇6, the values of : minutes are compared. If the value of the timer is greater than 5 minutes (this indicator is on for at least 5 minutes), then 3 continues; rewards return _ step 13 (8). This wait _ ensures that the charge store has a full charge and that the secret prevents the rogue from starting the program. In the step Shun, the timer is reset to monitor the period during which the lamp is turned off. f Steps to measure the towel, (4) The decision is that the button is transferred to v 1312; otherwise the control remains in the step. In step i3i2, the timing crying disk

Lt!T相比較。如果計時器大約等於2秒,諸如與2秒相差1秒以内:則 控制铃移到步驟1314 ;否則,控制返回到步驟13〇2。 ,步驟測中’重設計時器。控制在步驟1316中繼續,其中,控制 =疋否馳_。-旦舰靖,碰爾移馨驟腿;否則,控制 步驟1316巾。如果計時騎值小於10秒(這鮮程式賴已經在 ίο軸開始)’則控制轉侧步驟132G;否則,控制返回到步驟13〇〇。 f步驟1320中,如果計時器大於丨秒(這鮮程式賴在等待丨秒後 =i、’驗制轉移到步驟1322。否則,使用者未等待所要求的1秒,並 :制,酬步驟_。所述i秒延遲進—步保護防止程式規舰無意間 =趣在步驟B22 ’將一個被稱為咖t (計數)的變數初始 在步驟1324繼續,而重設計時器。 列 4㈣Ϊ步驟1326巾,如果織通,馳轉糊㈣1328 L控讎 夕丨竭1330。在步驟133〇中,如果計時器大於2〇秒,則已超過用於程 43 200835882 $規二广個靖周純沒有絲,测肋齡驟1300。否 並且於r!i=的時間’控制返回到步驟1326。在步驟1328中遞 、计數,亚且控制在步驟1332中繼續。 驟做定是否燈切斷。如紐靖,脸懈移到步 控制轉移到步驟1328 HI步1334中’如紐接通’則 〗:器已經超過2。秒,則控 否則在‘:、:3二I’如果计時器已經超過2〇秒,則控制轉移到步驟1340 ; 據叶數^二1 ^驟1332以等待燈切斷。在步驟134G,程式規劃模組根 所述魏咖1現在包含切斷職的«,並且可以 表袼m用3電力線载體收發器/接收器的表格1152、或用於計時器的 賴牛驟應的函數。控制然後結束。以#代方式’控制可以返 口到乂驟13G2以雜程式規劃模式再次啓動。 的业ΪίΐΪ*第圖:流程圖描述了對應於第21圖的表袼116°和1162 似的愛件:盘^ ^驟。、為了清楚目的’來自第22圖的附圖標號用於識別類 制在:驟1°3^Ω Ρ圖類似’在步驟1200 i 1208中啟動程式規麵組。控 所、才=猎由查?諸如第21 _表格116G絲格1162之類的表格來解譯 取^银= 針對第21圖更詳細所述,點和舰對應於觸騎時間長度。 心接、二=通的時間或切斷的時間可能是所關心的。例如,如果關 對’則燈應當被切換接通對應於點的短時間,以及被切換接通 ί應於剎線的較長的時間,而燈被切斷的時間不重要。 ^替代方式’燈可以保持接通’並且被切斷對應於點的短時間,並且 =^對應於劃線的較長的時間。浦然後在步驟ΐ2ΐ2繼續,而在開始的 或/Γ結束程式簡。在各種實财式^,允許程式規__可能更短 。例如’如綠猶直齡程式簡聰式 允 =斗較長的時間。然後控制結束。 44 200835882 現在參考第25圖,流程圖描述了對應於第21圖的表格1170和1172 的典範程式規劃步驟。為了清楚目的,來自第22圖的附圖標號用於識別類 似的零件。與第22圖類似,在步驟12〇〇到1208啟始程式規劃模組。控制 在步驟1370繼續,其中,燈以指定的時間期間接通或切斷。所述程式規劃 模組母個時間期間就是否存在功率進行取樣。Lt!T compared. If the timer is approximately equal to 2 seconds, such as within 1 second of 2 seconds, then the control bell moves to step 1314; otherwise, control returns to step 13〇2. , step in the measurement 'reset timer. Control continues in step 1316 where control = 疋 驰 _. - Once the ship Jing, hit the arm and move the legs; otherwise, control step 1316 towel. If the timed ride value is less than 10 seconds (this fresh program has already started at the ίο axis) then control turns to step 132G; otherwise, control returns to step 13A. In step 1320, if the timer is greater than leap seconds (this fresh program is after waiting for the leap second = i, 'the inspection moves to step 1322. Otherwise, the user does not wait for the required 1 second, and: the system, the reward step _. The i second delay advance protection prevents the program from inadvertently = interesting in step B22 'starts a variable called cal t (count) initially in step 1324, and resets the timer. Column 4 (four) Ϊ step 1326 towel, if weaving, rushing paste (four) 1328 L control 雠 丨 exhaust 1330. In step 133 ,, if the timer is greater than 2 〇 seconds, it has exceeded the use of the process 43 200835882 $ gauge two Guangjing Jing Zhouchun no Wire, rib length 1300. No and at time r!i = 'control returns to step 1326. In step 1328, the count is made, and the control is continued in step 1332. The step is to determine whether the light is turned off. For example, in New York, the face moves to step control and moves to step 1328. In step HI, step 1334, 'such as Newton' is turned on: the device has exceeded 2. seconds, then the control is otherwise in ':, : 3 II I' if the timer If it has exceeded 2 seconds, then control transfers to step 1340; according to the number of leaves ^ 2 1 1 1332 to wait for the light to cut off. Step 134G, the program planning module root Wei Ka 1 now includes the cut-off «, and can be used to represent the table 1152 of the 3 power line carrier transceiver/receiver or the Lai Niu The function then controls and then ends. The #代方式' control can be returned to step 13G2 to start again in the program programming mode. Industry Ϊ ΐΪ 第 第 : : : : : : : : : : : : 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图 流程图1162 Like a piece of love: disk ^ ^ ^. For the sake of clarity 'the reference number from Figure 22 is used to identify the type in: 1 ° 3 ^ Ω Ρ 类似 similar to 'starting the program in step 1200 i 1208 The quilt, the control, the hunter, the hunter, the table, such as the 21st _ table 116G Grid 1162, to interpret the silver = the more detailed description of Figure 21, the point and ship correspond to the length of the ride The time of the heart connection, the second = the time of the cut or the time of the cut may be of concern. For example, if it is off, then the light should be switched on for a short time corresponding to the point, and the switch should be switched on. The longer the time, and the time the light is cut off is not important. ^Alternative way 'lights can be kept connected Pass 'and is cut off for a short time corresponding to the point, and =^ corresponds to the longer time of the line. Pu then continues at step ΐ2ΐ2, and at the beginning or /Γ ends the program. In various real money types ^ Allows the program __ to be shorter. For example, 'If the green is still straight, the program is allowed to lock for a longer time. Then the control ends. 44 200835882 Now referring to Figure 25, the flowchart depicts the corresponding figure 21 The exemplary program planning steps of tables 1170 and 1172. For clarity purposes, the reference numerals from Figure 22 are used to identify similar parts. Similar to Fig. 22, the program planning module is started at steps 12 to 1208. Control continues at step 1370 where the light is turned "on" or "off" for a specified period of time. The program planning module samples whether there is power during the mother time period.

例如’如果所述時間期間是5秒長,則1〇〇1的序列將包括將燈接通5 秒,將燈切斷10秒,以及將燈接通5秒。程式規雛組可以在每個5秒期 間的中間取樣以允許使用者可變性。控制在步驟1372中繼續,其中,在諸 如30秒的預定時間期間内結束程式規劃。然後,控制結束。 現在參考第26圖,流程圖描述了使用者的另一種典範程式規劃方式。 控制在步驟剛巾_,其中,燈被接通在7和8秒之關長度。燈然後 在步驟1402中切斷。在步驟剛中,燈在5秒内再次接通。這個序列可 以産生程式規難號,其被傳送到電力線健接收器或收發器。 在接收到所述程式規劃信號時,電力線載體收發器可以傳送包含其識 別碼的吼息,該訊息可以被電力線載體控制模組接收以獲得控制器的位 址。以替代方式,所述程式規聽號可以使得電力線倾接㈣或收發器 將其識別碼重設到工薇設定的内定值。 以替代方式’程式規難號可錢得電力線紐收發賊接收器收聽 =’諸如位址設定指令。在這種情況下,一互電力線載體接收器/收發器 被置於收聽模式巾’酸藉由電力線健來顧命令。如果位址然後 Ϊ1 專ίΐί力線紐接㈣’縣力線賴接收器可以其後對藉由該位址 識別的命令做出回應。然後,控制結束。 規 26 =核組的功ι概要圖。電源购向計時模組1452供電嘴時雜顺 輸出程式補戠’該錢被電力_發器或接收哭接收。 ^時^ M52包括第-電阻㈣,其*有與電源_相連的第一端 和舁弟-電容S 1456的第-端相連的第二端 第 與參考電位(諸如接地電位)相連。第—電容器1456的二端與 45 200835882 器1458的第一輸入相連。 第-比較器M58的第二輸入 :==:rr供電。計時模 是金屬氧化物半導體場效=3^,第一和第二電晶體1462和1464 極,料咖細(咖et),綱祕、源極和汲 第-電晶體1462的源極與電源14 1464 =:=Γ和第二端分別與第-和第二電晶體1462和_ 觀第的1468 _—輸从帛二比較器 弟一1470的弟二端和第二電晶體1464的源極 ί目ίΓίί。第二比較器1468的第二輸人與第二參考電驗生器1472 相連丄第二參考電壓産生器1472 *電源145〇供電。 第二比較器1468的輸出被傳送到鎖定器1474。鎖定器1474被延遲模 組1476致動’延遲模組1476從電源145〇接收功率。第一和第二比較器购 定1 1474從電源麗触轉。鎖㈣1474的細作為程 當功率被首先施加到計時模組1452時,第一比較器1458的第一輸入 處於^考电位’因此其輸出處於參考電位,這是因爲跨第—電容器1456並 無電荷。第-比較器1458的低輸出切斷第二電晶體⑽4,並且導通第一電 晶體1462。因為第-電晶體1462被導通,因此第二電容器147〇經由 電阻器1466充電。 選擇第一和第二電容器1456和1470和第一和第二電阻14S4和1466 的值,使得第二電容器1470在第一電容器ι456之前被完全充電。一旦第 二電容器1470已經被完全充電,並且去除了對於電源145〇的供電^跨 第二電容器1470之電荷將緩慢地放電。 如果其後迅速向電源1450恢復供電,則將有足夠的電荷跨第二電容哭 46 200835882 wo以引起在第二比較器刪上的高輪出。這個高輸出然後被鎖定器綱 鎖定。鎖定器1474被延賴組147㈣動,一旦第二比較器刪在由電源 1450供電後有時間穩定下來,則延遲模組1476致動鎖定器1474。 〜鎖定器1474的輸出將保持爲冑,一直到從電路去除供電為止。如果在 第^容!I 147G已經完全充電後對於電源刪的供電保持接通,則第一 电谷态I456最後完全被充電。根據第—參考電壓産生器·,第一比較器 1458的輸出將在第—電容器1456完全充電時走高。這將切斷第一電晶體 1462並且‘通第一電晶體1464。第二電晶體1464將迅速轉放二 容器1470的電荷。For example, if the time period is 5 seconds long, a sequence of 1 〇〇 1 would include turning the light on for 5 seconds, turning the light off for 10 seconds, and turning the light on for 5 seconds. The program group can sample in the middle of each 5 second period to allow user variability. Control continues in step 1372, where the programming is ended within a predetermined time period, such as 30 seconds. Then, the control ends. Referring now to Figure 26, a flow chart depicts another exemplary programming approach for the user. Control is performed in step _, where the lamp is turned on at a length of 7 and 8 seconds. The lamp is then turned off in step 1402. In the first step, the lamp is turned on again within 5 seconds. This sequence can generate a program code that is transmitted to the power line receiver or transceiver. Upon receiving the programming signal, the power line carrier transceiver can transmit a message containing its identification code, which can be received by the power line carrier control module to obtain the address of the controller. Alternatively, the program gauge can cause the power line to tip (4) or the transceiver resets its identification code to the default value set by the work. In an alternative way, the program can be used to listen to the thief receiver. In this case, an inter-power line carrier receiver/transceiver is placed in the listening mode. The acid is commanded by the power line. If the address is then Ϊ1, the force line is connected to the receiver. The receiver can then respond to the command identified by the address. Then, the control ends. Regulation 26 = Summary of the work of the nuclear group. When the power supply is supplied to the timing module 1452, the output program is supplemented by the output program. The money is received by the power generator or the receiver. ^^^ M52 includes a first-resistor (four) having a first end connected to the power source _ and a second end connected to the first end of the --capacitor S 1456, connected to a reference potential (such as a ground potential). The two ends of the first capacitor 1456 are connected to the first input of the 45 200835882 device 1458. The second input of the first comparator M58: ==: rr power supply. The timing mode is the metal oxide semiconductor field effect = 3 ^, the first and second transistors 1462 and 1464 poles, the material and the fine, the source and the source of the source and the first transistor - 1462 14 1464 =:=Γ and the second end are respectively connected to the first and second transistors 1462 and the first 1468 _-the second source of the comparator 1470 and the source of the second transistor 1464 ί目ίΓίί. The second input of the second comparator 1468 is connected to the second reference electrical detector 1472. The second reference voltage generator 1472 * power supply 145 is powered. The output of the second comparator 1468 is passed to the latch 1474. The latch 1474 is actuated by the delay module 1476. The delay module 1476 receives power from the power supply 145A. The first and second comparators purchase 1 1474 from the power supply. When the fineness of the lock (four) 1474 is first applied to the timing module 1452, the first input of the first comparator 1458 is at the potential of the test, so that its output is at the reference potential because there is no charge across the first capacitor 1456. . The low output of the first comparator 1458 turns off the second transistor (10) 4 and turns on the first transistor 1462. Since the first transistor 1462 is turned on, the second capacitor 147 is charged via the resistor 1466. The values of the first and second capacitors 1456 and 1470 and the first and second resistors 14S4 and 1466 are selected such that the second capacitor 1470 is fully charged before the first capacitor ι456. Once the second capacitor 1470 has been fully charged, and the power supply to the power supply 145 is removed, the charge across the second capacitor 1470 will slowly discharge. If power is subsequently restored to power supply 1450, then there will be enough charge to cry across the second capacitor to cause a high turn-out at the second comparator. This high output is then locked by the locker. The latch 1474 is actuated by the group 147 (four). Once the second comparator is time-stabilized after being powered by the power source 1450, the delay module 1476 actuates the latch 1474. The output of the ~locker 1474 will remain 胄 until power is removed from the circuit. If you are in the first! After I 147G has been fully charged, the power supply for power-off is kept on, and the first valley state I456 is finally fully charged. According to the first reference voltage generator, the output of the first comparator 1458 will go high when the first capacitor 1456 is fully charged. This will cut the first transistor 1462 and pass the first transistor 1464. The second transistor 1464 will rapidly transfer the charge of the second container 1470.

…第二電阻器1466和第二電容器!㈣的值可以被選擇,以致於第二電 容益1470在大約6秒内充電,而第一電阻卿和第一電容器難的健 選擇,以致於第-電容器1456在大約8 _充電。侧者可以然後接通電 源,並且在6秒與8秒之間的時間後切斷電源。 電何將餘留在第二電容器1·上,這有可能#恢復供電時導致高程式 規劃信號。第三參考電驗生器1472蚊在第二電舞i㈣上剩餘的多 少電荷將産生來自第二電容器觸的高輸心例如’第二參考電難生器 1472可以被設計使得彳以去除供電達5秒。計時模址1452可以被修改來允 許更複_减賴雜。例如,可明加其他的啸 生程式規劃信號之前跟蹤更多的接通/切斷致動。 ^來在産 _參考第28圖’其顯示胁操作可控制燈具、調整器、及/或燈泡的 ,範方法15,在這式中’制任何適當财式將可控槪具調整 益、及/或燈泡置於程式規峨式巾。然後,使崎將燈働接通達到等於 用於自動域義望躺_間,賴者靖I可控槪1、遽哭或 燈泡測量和贿雜綱。可㈣縣、難料㈣織在已 通達到所儲存的期間後自動切斷燈。 上士 一…ΰ G經選入了程式規劃模式。 如果步驟15G8 4真’貞_在步驟1512祕計_ π—)。在步驟 1516中’控制決定是否&經使用開關切斷燈。如果步㈣16為真,則控制 47 200835882 在步驟1520巾停止計時器(Timeri)。在步驟1524巾,控制將自動切斷 時間設定為等麟料_ (Tim。控懒後結束。 現在參考第29 ® ’其顯示用轉射鋪鯓、調整或燈泡的另 -=典範紐1550。麟綠155G _制者交互個來蚊在自動關燈 之刖的時瞧1。可以在可_燈具、調整器及/紐泡賴造或安裝時初 始設定所程式規_雜持接通的程式規^也可雜據上述的方式 的-個或更多個絲何其他適㈣方式來設定所程式規__的初始設 定0 —-旦已經接通了燈開關,則可控制燈具、調整器及/或燈泡將使得光産 生讀産生光’-直到雜式賴的時間已_滿為止。為了縮減所程式 規』的㈣’可以在所程式規劃時間期滿之前手工+ 刀斷燈。燈接通的時間 數量將變為新的所程式規劃時間。 為了保4防止無思_減所程式規劃的時間,可以僅如果燈開關快速 連續地_、然後接通、然後斷I才更新所程式賴時間。如果燈開關 僅被斷開,則不影響所程式規__。在各個實施例中,可以定義最小 所程式規劃時間。如果在小於最小所程式規劃時關時㈣手功斷燈, 則所程式賴咖不變。這鱗制者將職職_,而不 規劃時間的佶。 為了增加難式賴_,—旦所程式關時間已經娜並且燈已經 撕,則使用者可以紐關循環地切斷然後接通。所述燈然後將保持接 ί 到使用者手讀將其靖為止。錢辦工干纖,所程式規劃 的1%間因此被增加所述燈接通的所述時間數量。 士在多,實施例中,新的所程式規劃時間包括在當程式規劃地切斷燈 二用者手工循環燈開關時之間的時間。如果當使用者將燈開關 通時燈,切斷—段很長的時間,則使用者可能不要延長所 二1七二j間/^疋開始新的照明循環。為此,如果在預定時間期間後 )刀:接通循環’酬程式規劃的時間不改變,並且燈僅被再次接通。 -旦所程式規劃的時間已經過去,則燈將再次被切斷。 48 200835882 為了防止娜式規__的無意間延長,騎使得麟延長所程式 規劃的時_關’舰切斷—接通更複雜。例如,可以當在燈被計劃 性地切斷後在預定時間數量内燈開關被切斷—接通—切斷—接通時’延長 所程式賴的賴。健細子,狀的_數量可以是1〇秒。...second resistor 1466 and second capacitor! The value of (D) can be selected such that the second capacitor 1470 is charged in about 6 seconds, while the first resistor and the first capacitor are difficult to select, so that the first capacitor 1456 is charged at about 8 _. The side can then turn the power on and turn off the power after a time between 6 seconds and 8 seconds. The electricity will remain on the second capacitor 1·, which may result in a high programming signal when the power is restored. The third reference electrical biodetector 1472 has a small amount of charge remaining on the second electro-optical i(4) that will generate a high-contrast from the second capacitive touch. For example, the 'second reference electrical trap 1472 can be designed to remove the power supply. 5 seconds. The timing module 1452 can be modified to allow for more complex _ subtraction. For example, it is possible to track more on/off actuations before other chirp programming signals are known. ^In the production _refer to Figure 28, which shows that the flank operation can control the luminaire, the adjuster, and/or the light bulb, the method 15 is, in this formula, the controllable cookware adjustment benefits, and / or the bulb is placed on the program gauge towel. Then, let Saki turn on the light to reach the equal value for the automatic domain lie, _ _ _ _ I can control the 槪 1, crying or bulb measurement and bribery. (4) The county and the unreasonable material (4) shall automatically cut off the lights after they have reached the storage period. Sergeant One...ΰ G has been selected into the program planning mode. If step 15G8 4 is true '贞_ at step 1512 secret _ π —). In step 1516, the control determines whether &# the lamp is turned off by using the switch. If step (four) 16 is true, then control 47 200835882 stops the timer (Timeri) at step 1520. In step 1524, the control sets the automatic cut-off time to equal _ (Tim. Controls lazy after the end. Now refer to the 29th ® 'which shows the use of the transfer paving, adjustment or bulb's another -= model new 1550. Green 155G _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ^ You can also set the initial setting of the program __ according to the above-mentioned way - one or more wires and other appropriate (four) way - once the light switch has been turned on, the lamps, adjusters and / or the light bulb will cause the light to produce a read-light-- until the time of the hybrid is already full. In order to reduce the (4) of the program, the light can be turned off manually before the program planning time expires. The amount of time will become the new programming time. In order to prevent the time of planning, you can update the program time only if the light switch is continuously and continuously _, then turned on, then I is turned off. If the light switch is only disconnected, it will not affect the program __ In each of the embodiments, the minimum programming time can be defined. If the hand is turned off when the time is less than the minimum programming (4), the program is unchanged. The scaler will take the job _ without planning The time is 佶. In order to increase the difficulty _, once the programmed time has passed and the light has been torn, the user can cycle and turn the button on and off. The light will then remain connected to the user's hand. The reading will be finished. The money is for the dry fiber, and the 1% of the program plan is therefore increased by the amount of time the lamp is turned on. In many cases, the new programming time is included in the case. The program is planned to cut off the time between when the user turns the light switch on and off. If the user turns off the light when the light is turned on, the user may not extend the two 1772. A new lighting cycle is started between j/^疋. For this reason, if the knife is turned on after the predetermined time period, the time of the cycle is not changed, and the lamp is only turned on again. Once the programmed time has passed, the lights will be cut off again. 48 200835882 In order to prevent the unintentional extension of the Na-style __, the ride makes the extension of the program. For example, the light switch can be turned off for a predetermined amount of time after the lamp is scheduled to be turned off - on-off - on - to extend the program. The number of _, the number of _ can be 1 〇.

方法1分0在步驟1552中開始’其中,控制決定是否燈已經被接通。 如果燈已織接通,碰雜_轉1554 ; ,控娜躲步驟1552 中。在步驟1554巾’控制將燈接通,並且在步驟1556中繼續,其中,控 制重設第-計時器(timetl)。—旦細如達騎程式規綱時間值,則燈 將自動切斷。控制在步驟1558中繼續’其中,控制歧是否已藉由手工燈 開關切斷了燈,果如此,脸制轉移到步驟⑽;否則,控制轉移到步 以替代方式,控制可以不是轉移到步驟測,而是轉移到步驟1564。 =1560實現_無_程式賴的可紐的更·雜式賴程和不 =燈:皮切断時更新所程式規_時間,而是僅當開關在τ秒的預定時間 内被切.触、織靖時,才更騎財觸的咖。在娜觸中, ,制決定是否被_的_在τ秒内跟著被接通再次切斷。 此,則控制在步驟1564繼續;侧,控制返回到步驟1552。 門ίίΓΓ4’控制決定是否Timerl大於最小所允許的所程式規劃的時 果如此,則控制轉移到步驟1566;否則,控制返回到步驟酸。步 J所分耸了 了針對無意間程式規劃的另—個保護。如果燈已經接通少於最 ,麻只新触__間。這允許迅速 地接通和切斷燈,而不影響所程式規劃的時間。 、 的所ΐΐ規ΖΓ具、咖、及/或燈泡可以具有1G分鐘的最小所允許 工作至内將燈接通小於10分鐘(諸如用於 , 間將保持在先前設定的兩個小時。 騎程式規嶺和 如果不期望這個保護,則可以跳過步驟1564,控制直接地進行到步驟 49 200835882 1566。在各種實現方式中,可以將最小所允許的所程式規劃的時間設定為 〇 ’有效地跳過步驟1564。在步驟1566,timerl的值被儲存爲新的所程式規 劃的時間。控制然後返回到步驟1552。 在步驟1562,控制決定是否timerl大於所程式規劃的時間。如果如此, 則控制轉移到步驟1568 ;否則,控制返回到步驟1558。在步驟1568,自動 切斷燈,並且控制在步驟1570繼續。在步驟157〇,重設第二計時器 (timer2),並且控制在步驟1572中繼續。 如果使用者在燈在步驟1568中自動切斷後之預定的回應時間内接通 燈,,控制可以根據燈被再次接通而更新所程式規劃的時間。例如,可以 將預疋回應時間設定為一分鐘。使用這個設定,一旦燈被切斷,則使用者 有为鐘來將燈再次接通,並且使得這個附加的接通時間儲存和併入所程 式規劃的時間。 在步驟1572,控制決定是否timer2大於預定的回應時間。如果如此, 則使用者可以將祕次接通,但是將不更麟程式賴的綱;控制返回 到乂驟1552。否貝丨J ’控制轉移到步驟1574。在步驟1574,控制決定是否燈 開關已經被切斷和接通。如果如此,則控制轉移到步驟1576 ;否則,控制 返回到步驟1572。在步驟1576,控制接通燈,並且在步驟1578中繼續。 、方法155G可以跡改以適應更複雜的程式賴程序,其賴防止所程 式規里㈣%間的無意間延長。例如,可以在步驟1574和1576之間插入另 -個比較’其中’控制決定是否燈關已經被峨和再次接通。如果如此, ,控伽續到步驟1578 ;否則,㈣將特,—直到關被切斷為止,此 處,控制返回到步驟1552。 在步驟1578,控制決定是否已經切斷了關。如果如此,則控制轉移 到步驟1580 ;否貝ij,控制保持在步驟1578中。在步驟158〇,控制將技順1 的值儲存為新的所程式規細顿。控懒後返酬步驟1552。 在上述的各種實現方式中,可以使關紋連接、在—個或更多個插孔 中谷納的-個或更多個接腳及/或其他電子機械連接,將燈泡及/或可控繼 泡連接_戀、燈具、可控簡避及/或可控碰具。在所述可控讎 50 200835882 泡、調整n紐具靖賴,可以藉由靖關並再次接通 接通燈。 、現在轉向帛30 p至第37圖,其顯示用於控繼和其他裝置的此外的 方式。,以上參考第2目至第29圖所述的前面的實現方式的一些中,使用 者以預^的樣式切轉關關,㈣可控讎泡、織器紐具進行程式 規劃。如同可喊解,可以使崎種方式交換雜式規缝料紐量受到 一^限制。 f第30 _至第37目中,可以將傳統開關替換為包括使用者介面的主 控制益。主控制器可以對一個或更多個位於遠端位置的可控制裝置進行程 式規劃。向可控制裝置供應的電力可以經由供應線而被提供到主控制器。 主控制器軸所述供絲向可鋪裝置舰_資料及/或程式資料。 僅作為例子,所述使用者介面可以包括小鍵盤、一個或更多個按鈕、 或其他的輸人裝置。當制者致動使用者介面時,主控彻使用遺失脈 衝袼式來經由供應線傳送控糖料及/或程式資料。因此,可以根據與介面 致動有_-域多組控織料及/或程式,來對所述可控繼置中^ 或更多個進行程式規劃。 、所述遺失脈衝袼式藉由去除功率信號的所選擇的期間的部分來編碼資 料將在下面進一步說明。這允許比藉由手工切換開關更快和更精確地 傳达貝吼。結果,可以不依賴於使用者的手工靈巧程度而執行更複雜的程 式規劃操作。例如,可以職置程式賴以接通到完全強度,在兩個小時 後降低到一半強度,在四個小時後切斷。 此外,控制器可以與複數個可控制裝置通信,並且可以根據使用者輸 入來協調複_可控齡·㈣。耕,#制者致麟如單個按^ 使用者介面元件時,可以與其他的可控制裝置不同地對與主 可控制裝置中的一些進行程式規劃。 β > 根據本發明,可以使用單個輸入來控制複數個可控制裝置。僅作為例 =三這允許包括複數個可控制燈的場景燈控制及/或對諸如電機驅動的遮光 窗簾的附加裝置的控制。也可以使用單個按鈕來對複數個可控制裝置進行 51 200835882 程式規劃,以將它們各自的燈接通到各種強度而用於不同的時間期間。所 述單個按鈕也可以在影響此行為的可控制裝置内選擇預定的程式。 如同以下說明,可以將電腦介面至主控制器及/或所述可控制裝置以儲 存或改變程式規劃資訊及/或引導主控制器的操作。所述電腦可以經由網頁 來存取介面。使用所述介面,使用者可以產生定制程式,並且將其下載到 主控制器。 八 簡而言之,在第30、30A和30B圖中介紹了典範系統。在第31α·31Ε) 圖中,更實施說明可以使用於向可控制裝置傳送資料的典範遺失脈衝編 碼。在第32-35Β圖中,描述了主控制器的典範零件。在第36Α-37圖中, 描述了可控制裝置的典範零件。在第38圖中,描述了可以用於向可控制裝 置令儲存初始程式規劃資料的典範安裝程式規劃器。 返回到第30圖,其提供了典範可程式規劃的負載控制系統的功能方塊 圖。主控制器1600-1 (諸如牆壁安裝的按鈕元件)從服務面板2〇2接收功 率。主控制器1600-1産生程式規劃資料並將其傳送到一個或更多個可控制 裝置(諸如可控制裝置1602-1和1602-2)。主控制器16004可以使用遺失 脈衝來編碼程式規劃資料,如下所述。 依據所述程式規劃資料,所述可控制裝置16〇2<4控制負載16〇4。負載 1604可以與可控制裝置1602-1整合,如第3〇圖中所示,或可以是各別的。 僅作為例子所述可控制裝置1602-1可以包括燈具、燈泡插座調整器、或 燈泡,而負載1604可以包括燈泡或光産生元件。 W ^ 1由使㈣失脈衝,當切綱麟,主㈣m觸]可以比人更快地 傳送資料。這允許比在其他方式下可能麟的更複_㈣操作。僅作為 例子’遺失脈衝方式允許傳送更特定的控制資#,諸如用於指令:全強度 地接通負載16G4、在X分鐘後降低強度、在y分鐘後進一步降低強度、並 且最後在z分鐘後關閉負載16〇4。 主控制器1600-1包括遺失脈衝傳送器1612,其從服務面板2〇2接收供 電三遺失脈衝傳送器1612向主控制器馨1的其他零件供電。遺失脈衝傳 迗斋1612向可控繼置16_魏神健,並且勤從功率信號去除脈 52 200835882 衝來對可控制裝置1602-1的控制資料進行編碼。 运失脈衝傳送益1612被控繼組1614控制。控模組1614可以盘選 ^件通信,翻科諸如:個者細刪、無線介面MM、電腦 71面1617、參數控繼組1618、及/或電力線介面162〇。使用者介面刪 允許使用者諸如藉由按下按鈕贿主控繼16G(M交 更詳細地被說明。 ^ ® 作為替代或補充,主控制H 16(KM可以經由無線介面祕及/或電力 線介面1620來接收使用者輸入'無線介面1616可以與其他主控制器(諸 _ 如主控制器1600-2)、與網路存取點及/或與個人電腦通信。無線介面祕 也可以與行動裝置(諸如行動裝置麵4和16〇8-2)通信。所述無線介面 可以使用無線區域網路(WLAN)標準,諸如IEEE lla、8〇211b、 8〇2.11g、802.11h、802·11η、802.16或802.20,並且所述無線介面可以支援 無線個人區域網路(WPAN)標準,諸如ιεεΕ 802.15.1。 電力線介面1620可以與其他主控制器(諸如主控制器16〇〇_2)、與電 力線載體控制模組(諸如電力線載體控制模組16〇6-1和16〇6-2)通信。電 力線介面1620經由與服務面板202相連的供應線而通信。電力線載體控制 模組1606-2、主控制器1600-2和另一個可控制裝置16〇2_3可以位於服務面 板202的另一個分支電路上。 _ 參數控制模組1618儲存由控制模組1614使用的負载特性、使用者偏 好和内定值之類的資料。當由同一主控制器控制複數個可控制裝置時,這 個資料可以包括可控制裝置的位址。這個資料也可以指定哪些可控制裝置 是場景的一部分,並且它們應該對於所述場景被設定到什麼強度。 參數控制模組1618可以在安裝主控制器1600-1時被組態,可以在使用 主控制器1600-1期間被更新,及/或可以在製造期間被硬編碼。參考第圖33 而更詳細地描述了參數控制模組1618。參數控制模組1618也可以被電腦介 面16Π程式規劃。 電腦介面1617可以包括串列介面(諸如RS-232或通用序列匯流排 (USB))、及/或網路介面(諸如i£EE8〇2.3)。藉由使用電腦介面1617, 53 200835882 使用者或安裝者可以更新參數控制模組1618的内容。例如,使用者可以存 取網站來產生定製程式。 此外,電腦介面1617也可以用於直接控制控制模組1614。以這種方式, 使用者可以控制可控制裝置,及/或從他們的電腦選擇場景。如果電腦連接 到網際網路,則可以遠端(諸如從使用者的辦公地點)向電腦傳送命令以 控制控制模組1614。 口主控制器1600-1可以包括接收器/電流偵測器1622,接收器/電流偵測 器1622與控制模組1614通信。接收器/電流偵測器1622可以感測由諸如可 控制裝置1602-1和1602-2的下游裝置消耗的電流。藉由在沒有遺失脈衝被 傳送的期間中斷電流的消耗,可控制裝置16〇2_ι可以向主控制器i6〇〇q發 回貧料。接收器/電流偵測器1622將這些遺失電流脈衝解碼爲用於主控制器 1600-1的資料。 %力線載體控制权組1606-1包括電力線介面1624,其經由被重疊在始 發自服務面板202的功率信號上的信號而與其他裝置通信。電力線載體控 制核組1606-1可以包括使用者介面1626及/或無線介面1628,其與電力線 介面1624通信。 電力線介面1624向主控制器1600-1及/或主控制器16〇〇_2傳送使用者 輸入資料。可以從使用者介面1626及/或無線介面1628接收使用者輸入資 料。無線介面1628從其他輸入裝置(諸如行動裝置丨繼心和·8_2)接 收使用者輸入資料。 行動裝置1608-1可以包括智慧型電話、膝上型電腦、個人數位助理、 遙控斋等。行動裝置1608-1包括無線介面1630和使用者介面1632。無線 介面1630無線地傳送經由使用者介面1632從使用者接收的資料。無線介 面1630也以作為來自可能超出主控制器1600-1的範圍的裝置(諸如行動裝 置1608-2)的無線信號的中繼器。 可控制裝置1602-1包括開關1640、裝置控制模組1642、以及遺失脈衝 接收器1644。開關1640從主控制器1600_1的遺失脈衝傳送器1612接收功 率信號。開關1640被裝置控制模組1642控制。裝置控制模組1642被遺失 54 200835882 脈衝接收器1644組態。 裝置控制模組1642也可以與參數控制模組1646通信,參數控制模組 1646提供可以在安裝期間組態的參數。在各種實現方式中,參數控制模組 1646也可以在正常操作期間被遺失脈衝接收器1644更新。參數控制模組 1646可以包括資料,其諸如:在主控制器^⑻彳的參數控制模組i6i8中 儲存的資料。此外,可以經由與電腦介面1617類似的電腦介面1648來程 式規劃及/或更新參數控制模粗1646。Method 1 is divided into 0 in step 1552 where the control determines if the light has been turned "on". If the light has been woven, touch _ turn 1554;, control Na hides in step 1552. At step 1554, the control turns the light on and continues in step 1556, where the control resets the time-timer. The light will be automatically cut off if it is as detailed as the rider specification time value. Control continues in step 1558, where control does not have the lamp turned off by the manual light switch, and as such, the face transitions to step (10); otherwise, control transfers to step in an alternative manner, and control may not be transferred to the step test Instead, the process moves to step 1564. =1560 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ When weaving Jing, I was able to ride the coffee. In the touch, the system determines whether or not _ is _ _ within τ seconds followed by being turned on again. Thus, control continues at step 1564; side, control returns to step 1552. The gate ίίΓΓ 4' control determines whether the Timerl is greater than the minimum allowed program schedule, then control transfers to step 1566; otherwise, control returns to the step acid. Step J has shouted another protection for unintentional programming. If the light has been turned on less than the most, hemp only touches __. This allows the lights to be turned on and off quickly without affecting the programmed time. The cookware, coffee, and/or light bulbs can have a minimum allowable work of 1 G minutes to turn the light on for less than 10 minutes (such as for, the two will remain at the previously set two hours. If the protection is not desired, then step 1564 can be skipped and control proceeds directly to step 49 200835882 1566. In various implementations, the minimum allowed programmed time can be set to 〇 'effectively hopping Step 1564. The value of timerl is stored as the new programmed time in step 1566. Control then returns to step 1552. In step 1562, the control determines if timerl is greater than the programmed time. If so, then control transfers Go to step 1568; otherwise, control returns to step 1558. At step 1568, the light is automatically turned off and control continues at step 1570. At step 157, the second timer (timer2) is reset and control continues in step 1572 If the user turns on the light within a predetermined response time after the lamp is automatically turned off in step 1568, the control may be further based on when the light is turned back on. The programmed time. For example, the preview response time can be set to one minute. With this setting, once the light is turned off, the user has the clock to turn the light on again, and this additional turn-on time is made. The time of program planning is stored and merged. In step 1572, the control determines whether timer2 is greater than the predetermined response time. If so, the user can turn the secret time on, but will not be more versatile; control returns to 乂Step 1552. No Bell J' control transfers to step 1574. At step 1574, control determines whether the light switch has been turned off and on. If so, then control transfers to step 1576; otherwise, control returns to step 1572. Step 1576, the control turns on the light, and continues in step 1578. Method 155G can be modified to accommodate more complex programs, which prevent unintentional extension between (4)% of the program. For example, steps can be taken. Inserting another comparison between 1574 and 1576 'where' control determines whether the light has been turned off and on again. If so, control continues to step 1578; Then, (4) will be special, until the off is cut off, where control returns to step 1552. At step 1578, control determines whether the off has been turned off. If so, then control transfers to step 1580; Control remains in step 1578. In step 158, control stores the value of the trick 1 as a new gauge. The lazy back is returned to step 1552. In the various implementations described above, the close connection can be made. , one or more pins and/or other electromechanical connections in the one or more jacks, the bulb and/or the controllable bubble connection_love, luminaire, controllable and/or Or controllable touch. In the controllable 雠 50 200835882 bubble, adjust n button jing, you can turn on the light by Jing Jing and turn it on again. Turn now to 帛30p to Figure 37, which shows additional ways to control and other devices. In some of the foregoing implementations described above with reference to Figures 2 through 29, the user cuts the clearance in a pre-formed manner, and (4) controls the brewing and weaving tools to perform programming. As can be screaming, it can be used to limit the exchange of miscellaneous gauges. f In the 30th to the 37th, the conventional switch can be replaced with the main control benefit including the user interface. The main controller can program one or more controllable devices located at a remote location. The power supplied to the controllable device can be supplied to the main controller via the supply line. The main controller shaft is supplied to the shipable device_data and/or program data. For example only, the user interface may include a keypad, one or more buttons, or other input device. When the manufacturer activates the user interface, the master uses the lost pulse to transmit the sugar control and/or program data via the supply line. Therefore, the controllable relay can be programmed according to the interface with the _-domain multi-control woven fabric and/or program. The missing pulse mode encodes the information by removing portions of the selected period of the power signal as will be further described below. This allows Bellow to be communicated faster and more accurately than by manually switching the switch. As a result, more complex planning operations can be performed independent of the user's manual dexterity. For example, the job program can be turned on to full strength, reduced to half the intensity after two hours, and cut off after four hours. In addition, the controller can communicate with a plurality of controllable devices and can coordinate complex _ controllable age (4) based on user input. When the cultivator, the creator, can program the components of the main controllable device differently from other controllable devices, such as a single user interface component. β > According to the present invention, a single input can be used to control a plurality of controllable devices. By way of example only three, this allows control of scene lights including a plurality of controllable lights and/or control of additional devices such as motor-driven shades. It is also possible to use a single button to program a plurality of controllable devices to switch their respective lamps to various intensities for different time periods. The single button can also select a predetermined program within the controllable device that affects this behavior. As explained below, the computer interface can be interfaced to the host controller and/or the controllable device to store or change programming information and/or to direct operation of the host controller. The computer can access the interface via a web page. Using the interface, the user can generate a custom program and download it to the host controller. In short, the paradigm system is presented in Figures 30, 30A and 30B. In the 31st 31st map, a more detailed description can be used for the exemplary lost pulse code for transmitting data to the controllable device. In Sections 32-35, a typical part of the main controller is described. In Figures 36-37, exemplary parts of controllable devices are described. In Fig. 38, a typical installer planner that can be used to store initial programming data to a controllable device is described. Returning to Figure 30, it provides a functional block diagram of a typical programmable load control system. The main controller 1600-1 (such as a wall mounted button element) receives power from the service panel 2〇2. The main controller 1600-1 generates program planning material and transmits it to one or more controllable devices (such as controllable devices 1602-1 and 1602-2). The main controller 16004 can use the missing pulses to encode the programming data as described below. According to the program planning data, the controllable device 16〇2<4 controls the load 16〇4. The load 1604 can be integrated with the controllable device 1602-1, as shown in Figure 3, or can be separate. The controllable device 1602-1 may include, as an example, a light fixture, a light bulb socket adjuster, or a light bulb, and the load 1604 may include a light bulb or light generating element. W ^ 1 is caused by (4) loss of pulse, when the cut line Lin, the main (four) m touch] can transmit data faster than people. This allows for a more complex _(four) operation than might be possible in other ways. By way of example only, the 'lost pulse mode allows for the transmission of more specific control elements, such as for instructions: full load on load 16G4, reduced intensity after X minutes, further reduction in intensity after y minutes, and finally after z minutes Turn off the load 16〇4. The main controller 1600-1 includes a lost pulse transmitter 1612 that receives the power three lost pulse transmitter 1612 from the service panel 2〇2 to supply power to other parts of the main controller. Lost pulse transmission 迗 迗 16 1612 to controllable relay 16_ Wei Shenjian, and diligently remove the pulse from the power signal 52 200835882 rushed to encode the control data of the controllable device 1602-1. The lost pulse transmission benefit 1612 is controlled by the group 1614. The control module 1614 can perform disk-selection communication, such as: individual deletion, wireless interface MM, computer 71 face 1617, parameter control group 1618, and/or power line interface 162 〇. The user interface deletion allows the user to follow the 16G by pressing the button. (M is explained in more detail. ^ ® As an alternative or in addition, the main control H 16 (KM can be via the wireless interface and / or power line interface) 1620 to receive user input 'wireless interface 1616 can communicate with other host controllers (such as main controller 1600-2), with network access points and/or with personal computers. Wireless interface secrets can also be used with mobile devices Communication (such as mobile device planes 4 and 16 8-2). The wireless interface may use wireless local area network (WLAN) standards such as IEEE lla, 8〇211b, 8〇2.11g, 802.11h, 802·11n, 802.16 or 802.20, and the wireless interface can support wireless personal area network (WPAN) standards, such as ιεεΕ 802.15.1. Power line interface 1620 can be connected to other main controllers (such as main controller 16〇〇_2), and power lines Carrier control modules (such as power line carrier control modules 16 6-1 and 16 〇 6-2) communicate. Power line interface 1620 communicates via a supply line connected to service panel 202. Power line carrier control module 1606-2, main Controller 1600-2 Another controllable device 16〇2_3 can be located on another branch circuit of the service panel 202. The parameter control module 1618 stores data such as load characteristics, user preferences, and default values used by the control module 1614. When the same master controller controls a plurality of controllable devices, this data may include the address of the controllable device. This profile may also specify which controllable devices are part of the scene and what strengths they should be set for the scene. The parameter control module 1618 can be configured when the main controller 1600-1 is installed, can be updated during use of the main controller 1600-1, and/or can be hard coded during manufacture. Refer to Figure 33 for more details. The parameter control module 1618 is described. The parameter control module 1618 can also be programmed by a computer interface. The computer interface 1617 can include a serial interface (such as RS-232 or Universal Serial Bus (USB)), and/or a network. The interface (such as i£EE8〇2.3). The user or installer can update the content of the parameter control module 1618 by using the computer interface 1617, 53 200835882. For example, the user can access the website to generate a customized program. In addition, the computer interface 1617 can also be used to directly control the control module 1614. In this way, the user can control the controllable device and/or from their computer. Select the scene. If the computer is connected to the Internet, the remote control (such as from the user's office location) can send commands to the computer to control the control module 1614. The port master controller 1600-1 can include receiver/current detection The receiver 1622, the receiver/current detector 1622 is in communication with the control module 1614. Receiver/current detector 1622 can sense current consumed by downstream devices such as controllable devices 1602-1 and 1602-2. The control unit 16〇2_ι can send back the lean material to the main controller i6〇〇q by interrupting the consumption of current during the period in which no missing pulses are transmitted. Receiver/current detector 1622 decodes these lost current pulses into data for main controller 1600-1. The % force carrier control group 1606-1 includes a power line interface 1624 that communicates with other devices via signals that are superimposed on the power signal originating from the service panel 202. The power line carrier control core set 1606-1 can include a user interface 1626 and/or a wireless interface 1628 that is in communication with the power line interface 1624. The power line interface 1624 transmits user input data to the main controller 1600-1 and/or the main controller 16A_2. User input data can be received from user interface 1626 and/or wireless interface 1628. The wireless interface 1628 receives user input data from other input devices, such as mobile devices, and 8_2. The mobile device 1608-1 may include a smart phone, a laptop, a personal digital assistant, a remote control, and the like. Mobile device 1608-1 includes a wireless interface 1630 and a user interface 1632. Wireless interface 1630 wirelessly transmits data received from the user via user interface 1632. The wireless interface 1630 also functions as a repeater for wireless signals from devices that may extend beyond the range of the main controller 1600-1, such as the mobile device 1608-2. The controllable device 1602-1 includes a switch 1640, a device control module 1642, and a lost pulse receiver 1644. The switch 1640 receives the power signal from the lost pulse transmitter 1612 of the main controller 1600_1. Switch 1640 is controlled by device control module 1642. The device control module 1642 was lost 54 200835882 Pulse Receiver 1644 configuration. Device control module 1642 can also be in communication with parameter control module 1646, which provides parameters that can be configured during installation. In various implementations, parameter control module 1646 can also be updated by lost pulse receiver 1644 during normal operation. The parameter control module 1646 can include data such as data stored in the parameter control module i6i8 of the main controller (8). In addition, the parameter control mode 1646 can be programmed and/or updated via a computer interface 1648 similar to the computer interface 1617.

現在參考第30A和30B圖,其顯示將主控制器連接到可控制裝置的各 種方式。在第30A和30B圖中,其顯示主控制器1600之一的簡單圖式。在 第30A圖中,遺失脈衝傳送器1612直接與各可控制裝置i6〇2_ai、 1602-A2、…、1602-AX 通信。 在第30B圖中’这失脈衝傳送器1612與一個或更多個節點ι647通信。 可控制裝置16G2.B卜16G2.B2、···、16G2_BX的每個或直接地與節點^7 通信,或離地與節點1647 (經由其他節點一未示出)通信。如同可以 瞭解,與第30A和30B目有關的混合主控制器可以用於直接連接和藉由一 個或更多個節點的連接。遺失脈衝傳送器1612除了被傳送到可控制裝置 1602的其他控制資料之外還産生定址資料。 所述定址資料選擇與被傳送的控糖料有_可控制裝置。在第3〇b 圖中的組態的優點包括··到主控儀_ _化連接。主控繼可 以被配置在鎌如。可麟於分聰每個可控做置臟崎有的功率 導體連接到顧-接·内的主控繼刪。此外,所述定址方式允 數個可控制裝置被連接和個別地被控制。 現在> 考第31A目,其提供了遺失脈衝傳送_式。典型地由頻率為 4^之正贼電顧形mo承載鱗。.,所述鮮可以是大約5〇 赫茲或⑼〇電壓》歸膽的每個觸由正半正弦波和負半正弦波 ,成。如果這些半正弦⑽複數個部分(也稱為脈衝)賊短,則下游 衣置可以將這些遺失脈衝解譯爲資料。 例如,在⑽描述了遺失脈衝1魏形丨在遺失脈衝17_間 55 200835882 =沿t虛線的正弦波1703,而是鋪平坦。遺规衝·僅為了典範的 和結束都麵零處辭删遺失。遺失脈衝可以對 :;l7(K)的周、期的任何部分發生,且無須在過零處開始或停止。但 2力广令处之間傳失脈衝可能縮減對用於編碼遺失脈衝的開關上的 一、虫^脈衝1702之後是兩個全脈衝,然後是一個第二遺失脈衝。苐 =j脈衝17G4錢是兩齡脈衝,織是第三遺失猶丨。這個全脈 由、、运失脈衝的序列可以被解譯爲資料。電壓波形!可以大約零伏特為 爾lif此’在遺失脈衝的時間_,可以將電壓保持在零伏特。可以應 捨人遺失脈衝的角(諸如在171(M和mG_2中所示的那些幻, 將电壓波形1700上的高頻雜訊最小化。 们減了可用於下游裝置的功率。僅作為例子,如果在賴波 / 〇〇中存在母秒120個脈衝並且每秒去除6個脈衝,則僅遺失平均功率 僅母秒幾鱗號的資料率仍獻於人藉㈣雜壁開關而 月b夠可罪地獲仵的,並且僅略微縮減了可獲得的功率。 藉由給資料區分優先順序和在傳送較低優先級數據之前向可控制裝置 1602-1傳送更高優先順序的資料,可以有效地使料個資料^例如,言 優先級數據可以包括紐貞載的強度。諸如未來珊物斷事件計時的資 Λ可以具有較低優先順序。例如,如果指示可控制裝置赚^完全接通3〇 分鐘然後在隨後的時間(諸如3〇分鐘後)將強度降低2S%,則僅立即傳送 完全接通命令。存在30分鐘的時間來傳送調降百分比和計時資訊。, 被傳送的資料可以選擇性地包括資料完整性量度,諸如奇偶校驗位元 W或CRC (循環冗餘校驗)值。第胤31D圖描述了遺失脈衝的其他的典 範實現方式。第31B圖描述了遺失脈衝1712,其中,正半正弦波的卿皮 限制到大於零的特定賴。齡地,負半正弦波可嫌則、於 · 壓以產生遺失脈衝。 7 '电 第31C圖描述遺失脈衝1714,其中,去除了小於正半正弦波的一半。 對於被去除的半正弦波的部分,電壓可以恢復到零(如第31c圖中所示) 56 200835882 或某個非零。第仙圖描述了遺失脈衝1716,其中,去除了 波和負半正弦波兩者的複數個部分。當如第31D圖中所示去除了每^ 弦波的-^時’可以從任何一個半正弦波去除大於或小於一半。 倾ίϊ11可以產生參考正弦波以決定是否脈衝遺失。#所接㈣功率产 號與參考正紐相差朗較百纽歧對量達_過職_期間^ 接收益可以決定脈衝遺失。為了避免必須產生參考正弦波,接收哭可 生一個或更多個參考點來決定是否脈衝遺失。 抑 例如,可以對於第31A圖的正半正弦波定義參考點。參 包括振幅資訊,並且以包括時間資訊。時間資訊可以齡在電屢波 形1700的-個周期内何時_振幅。例如,參考點17胸可以指 ==%點進行測量,其中,每個期開始於正向前進的過零點(諸如點 這樣的周_ 25%點落在正半正驗的中間。#進人的功率信 25%點超過參考點的賴時,發生全脈衝。當就像對於遺失脈衝17〇2 那樣,進入的功率信號在25%點小於參考點17m的電壓時,細到遺失 脈衝。 接收器可以测量是否電壓波形17⑻在周期内的任何時間超過參考點 -I的電廢。在這種情況下,參考點17m不必包括時間資訊。對於全 脈衝,電壓波形1700將在所述25%點周圍(諸如在2〇%和3〇%之間)超過 點1718-1。對於弟31A圖的正遺失脈衝17〇2,電壓波开多1700將在整 個,失脈衝周期期間不超過參考點17組。可以對於負遺失脈衝(諸如對 於第二遺失脈衝1704)定義類似的參考點。 對於第31B圖的遺失脈衝1712,可以與參考IS HI類似地組態參考 2 1718 2。因為在弟31B圖的全脈衝的電壓和遺失脈衝的電壓之間有較小 ,差別,因此應當更準確地定義參考點。這樣的遺失脈衝的細可 能更容易有因爲雜訊導致的誤差。 可以分別對於第31C和31D圖的遺失脈衝1714和1716定義參考點 1718-3和1718-4。參考點171心3和1718·4包括計時資訊,這是因為遺失脈 57 200835882 衝的複數铸分超過參考點丨肌3和1718领電壓。因此在辨信號的特 定區域中評估參考點1718_3和1718-4。 參考點Π18-3可以指示應當將其電壓與在周期的第二個四分之一中獲 知的測1值相比較,其中,限定周期在正向前進的過零點開始。參 考點1718_4可以指示應當將其賴與在馳的第四個四分之―獲得的測量 值相比較。 現在參考第32圖,其提供了典範使用者介面172G的圖式。使用者介 面1720可以包括一個或更多個按鈕,諸如按鈕、1722_2、、 =及17=4 ’其被統稱為按鈕1722。藉由按下按紐1722之一,使用者可以 透擇預疋的負載特性。按鈕1722及/或使用者介面172〇的對應的區域可以 包括·用於描述與每個按鈕1722有關的功能的標記。 、僅作為例子,按鈕1722-1可以在全接通和切斷之間切換。按鈕1722 可^擇30刀鐘的全接通,然後是15分鐘的半接通,以及然後切斷。按 鈕1722-3可以選擇3小時的四分之一接通,之後切斷。按《丑1722_4可以選 擇2小日守的全接通,之後四分之一接通。按紐1722的預定特性可以由使用 者經由使用者介面172〇改變,或可以使用如下更詳細舰的參數控制模組 來修改按紐1722的預續性。使用者介面172()還可以包括介面缝,諸 如小鍵盤' LCD顯示器、旋鈕、開關及/或桿。 現在參考第33A_33C ®,其提供了典齡數控麵_魏方塊圖。 所述參數控細組允許使用者改變與触有_魏。料33A时,參 數控麵組175G包括變光關1752。所述魏_ 1752可喊擇用於操 作負載㈣縣度及/或強度。例如,變光關1752可輯擇:m個強度 中的一個或更多個、以及N個期Μ中的-個或更多個。 八第33Β圖中,參數控制模組1760包括一個或更多個分壓器1762。 分壓器1762精細調整負載操作的期間和強度。例如,分壓器㈣中的一 個或更多個可以決定範圍為〇%到綱%的強度,而分壓器⑽中的一個或 更多個可以決定範圍為〇分鐘到預定上限的時間期間。 在第33C圖巾,參數控制模組1770包括非揮發性記憶體而。非揮 58 200835882 發性記憶體!772可以在安裝時被程式規劃嘁經 參數控制模組可以位於主控制器_中、可控== 中或运處。 參數^讎組Π料妨含峨財獅㈣麵作雖岐值。非 揮發性記舰1772可以包括可裝卸儲存體,諸如快閃記憶 可以從參數控制歡Π70去除非揮發性儲存體m 且使 4 的記憶體卡電腦介面,以更新其内容。 個Ί廣德付 可用哭35A/m的佈線組態。在第3仏圖中,僅一條供應線 ;工制⑽在弟35A目令,兩條供應線可用於主控制器糾 和35B描述了,於這兩種佈線組態的遺失脈衝傳送器的典範》實現方式: 現在參考第34A圖,遺失脈衝傳送器18〇2接收第一 冰 二==除了遺失脈衝之外將第一供應線與可控制裝置隐1連接。可 == ㈣二供應線。在第34B圖中,遺失脈衝傳送器職 ί第:Γ4:模組1806、以及電荷儲存模組1808。開關1804接 收第-供應線,亚且選擇性地向可控制裝置廳巧輸出功率。 接 可以包括三端雙向可财關元件雜何其他適當的裝置。 且::广上808儲存來自第一供應線的電荷。電荷儲存模,组1808向控 提供功率,並且也向遺失脈衝傳送胃職之外的主控= -的其他零件提供功率。當開關刪斷開並且 停止流過開關麵時,電荷儲存模組函可以接收電^供應線的4Referring now to Figures 30A and 30B, there are various ways of connecting the main controller to the controllable device. In the 30A and 30B drawings, it shows a simple diagram of one of the main controllers 1600. In Fig. 30A, the lost pulse transmitter 1612 directly communicates with each of the controllable devices i6〇2_ai, 1602-A2, ..., 1602-AX. In Fig. 30B, 'this pulse transmitter 1612 is in communication with one or more nodes ι 647. Each of the controllable devices 16G2.Bb, 16G2.B2, . . . , 16G2_BX communicates directly with the node ^7, or communicates with the node 1647 (via other nodes one not shown). As can be appreciated, the hybrid master controller associated with sections 30A and 30B can be used for direct connection and connection by one or more nodes. The lost pulse transmitter 1612 generates addressing data in addition to other control data that is transmitted to the controllable device 1602. The address data selection and the controlled sugar control material have a controllable device. The advantages of the configuration in Figure 3b include the transition from the master to the master. The master can be configured, for example. The power of the conductor can be connected to the main control of the Gu-Jian. Moreover, the addressing mode allows a plurality of controllable devices to be connected and individually controlled. Now > Test No. 31A, which provides a lost pulse transmission _ formula. The scale is typically carried by a thief with a frequency of 4^. The fresh can be about 5 Hz or (9) 〇 voltage, each of which is a positive half sine wave and a negative half sine wave. If these half-sine (10) complex parts (also known as pulses) are short, the downstream clothing can interpret these missing pulses as data. For example, in (10) it is described that the missing pulse 1 Wei-shaped 丨 is in the missing pulse 17_ between 55 200835882 = sine wave 1703 along the t-dotted line, but flattened. The rules and regulations are only for the model and the end of the zero-faced words are deleted. Lost pulses can occur for any part of the week, period of :7 (K), and do not need to start or stop at zero crossings. However, the loss pulse between the two forces may be reduced to one of the switches used to encode the missing pulse, the pulse 1702 is followed by two full pulses, and then a second lost pulse.苐 = j pulse 17G4 money is a two-year pulse, weaving is the third lost. This sequence of full pulse and lost pulses can be interpreted as data. Voltage waveform! It can be about zero volts for this time, at the time of the lost pulse, the voltage can be kept at zero volts. The angle at which the pulse is lost can be reduced (such as those shown in 171 (M and mG_2), minimizing high frequency noise on voltage waveform 1700. We reduce the power available to downstream devices. For example only, If there are 120 pulses in the mother wave and 6 pulses per second in the Laibo/〇〇, then only the average power is lost. Only the data rate of the mother's seconds is still dedicated to the person. (4) The wall switch is enough. The crime is sinful and only slightly reduces the available power. By prioritizing the data and transmitting higher priority data to the controllable device 1602-1 before transmitting the lower priority data, it is effective For example, the priority data may include the strength of the load. For example, the asset timing of the future event may have a lower priority. For example, if the controllable device is instructed to earn ^ fully connected 3〇 Minutes then reduce the intensity by 2S% at a later time (such as after 3 minutes), then only the full turn-on command is transmitted immediately. There is 30 minutes to transmit the cut-off percentage and timing information. To selectively include data integrity metrics such as parity bit W or CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) values. Figure 31D depicts other exemplary implementations of missing pulses. Figure 31B depicts missing pulses. 1712, wherein the positive half-sine wave is limited to a specific value greater than zero. The age, the negative half-sine wave can be suspected, and the pressure is generated to generate a missing pulse. 7 'Electrification 31C depicts the missing pulse 1714, wherein , removed less than half of the positive half sine wave. For the portion of the removed half sine wave, the voltage can be restored to zero (as shown in Figure 31c) 56 200835882 or some non-zero. The fairy map depicts the missing pulse 1716, wherein a plurality of portions of both the wave and the negative half sine wave are removed. When the -^ of each sine wave is removed as shown in Fig. 31D, it may be removed from any one of the half sine waves by more than or less than half. ϊ ϊ 可以 11 can generate a reference sine wave to determine whether the pulse is lost. #接(四)The power production number is different from the reference positive 朗 较 较 百 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ produce Referring to a sine wave, receiving a cry may generate one or more reference points to determine whether the pulse is missing. For example, a reference point may be defined for the positive half sine wave of Figure 31A. The reference includes amplitude information and includes time information. The information can be measured over the period of -1 cycle of the electrical waveform 1700. For example, reference point 17 chest can be measured by ==% point, where each period begins with a positive zero crossing (such as a point) Week _ 25% points fall in the middle of the positive half-test. When the power signal of 25% exceeds the reference point, a full pulse occurs. When it is like the missing pulse 17〇2, the incoming power signal is When the 25% point is less than the voltage of the reference point of 17m, the missing pulse is fine. The receiver can measure whether the voltage waveform 17(8) exceeds the electrical waste of the reference point -I at any time during the period. In this case, the reference point 17m does not have to include time information. For a full pulse, voltage waveform 1700 will exceed point 1718-1 around the 25% point (such as between 2〇% and 3〇%). For the positive missing pulse 17〇2 of the 31A picture, the voltage wave is more than 1700 will be in the whole, and the reference point 17 group will not be exceeded during the pulse loss period. A similar reference point can be defined for a negative missing pulse, such as for the second lost pulse 1704. For the missing pulse 1712 of Figure 31B, reference 2 1718 2 can be configured similarly to the reference IS HI. Since there is a small difference between the voltage of the full pulse of the FIGURE 31B and the voltage of the missing pulse, the reference point should be defined more accurately. The fineness of such a lost pulse may be more likely to have errors due to noise. Reference points 1718-3 and 1718-4 may be defined for the missing pulses 1714 and 1716 of the 31C and 31D maps, respectively. Reference Point 171 Hearts 3 and 1718·4 include timing information, which is due to the loss of the pulse 57 200835882 The multiple castings of the punch exceed the reference point of the diaphragm 3 and the 1718 collar voltage. Reference points 1718_3 and 1718-4 are therefore evaluated in a particular region of the signal. Reference point Π 18-3 may indicate that its voltage should be compared to a measured value 1 known in the second quarter of the cycle, wherein the defined period begins at a zero crossing of the forward advance. Reference point 1718_4 may indicate that the measured value obtained by the fourth quarter of the ride should be compared. Referring now to Figure 32, a diagram of an exemplary user interface 172G is provided. User interface 1720 can include one or more buttons, such as buttons, 1722_2, =, and 17=4', which are collectively referred to as button 1722. By pressing one of the buttons 1722, the user can select the desired load characteristics. Corresponding regions of button 1722 and/or user interface 172A may include indicia for describing functions associated with each button 1722. By way of example only, button 1722-1 can be toggled between full on and off. The button 1722 can be fully turned on for 30 knives, then half-turned for 15 minutes, and then turned off. Button 1722-3 can be selected to be turned on for a quarter of 3 hours, and then cut off. According to "Ugly 1722_4, you can choose to fully turn on 2 small day guards, and then turn on one quarter." The predetermined characteristics of the button 1722 can be changed by the user via the user interface 172, or the pre-continuation of the button 1722 can be modified using the parameter control module of the more detailed ship as follows. The user interface 172() may also include interface seams such as a keypad 'LCD display, knobs, switches and/or levers. Referring now to Section 33A_33C ® , which provides a chronological CNC surface _ Wei block diagram. The parameter control group allows the user to change and touch the wei. At the time of material 33A, the reference numerical control quilt 175G includes a dimming off 1752. The Wei _ 1752 can be used to select the operating load (4) county and/or strength. For example, the dimming off 1752 can be selected: one or more of the m intensities, and one or more of the N periods. In the eighty-third diagram, the parameter control module 1760 includes one or more voltage dividers 1762. The voltage divider 1762 finely adjusts the period and intensity of the load operation. For example, one or more of the voltage dividers (four) may determine an intensity ranging from 〇% to 纲%, and one or more of the voltage dividers (10) may determine a time period ranging from 〇 minute to a predetermined upper limit. At the 33C towel, the parameter control module 1770 includes non-volatile memory. Non-swing 58 200835882 Hair memory! The 772 can be programmed by the program during installation. The parameter control module can be located in the main controller _, controllable == medium or transport. The parameter ^雠 group 妨 妨 妨 妨 妨 妨 ( 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 四 四The non-volatile record ship 1772 can include a removable storage body, such as a flash memory that can remove the non-volatile storage medium m from the parameter control box 70 and cause the memory card computer interface of 4 to update its contents. Ί广德付 You can use the cabling configuration of crying 35A/m. In the third chart, there is only one supply line; the industrial system (10) is in the 35A order, two supply lines can be used for the main controller to correct 35B, and the model of the lost pulse transmitter in these two wiring configurations Implementation Mode: Referring now to Figure 34A, the lost pulse transmitter 18〇2 receives the first ice 2== in addition to the missing pulse, the first supply line is connected to the controllable device. Can == (four) two supply lines. In Fig. 34B, the missing pulse transmitter job is: Γ4: module 1806, and charge storage module 1808. Switch 1804 receives the first supply line and selectively outputs power to the controllable device. The connection may include a three-terminal bidirectional financial component and other suitable devices. And:: Wide 808 stores the charge from the first supply line. The charge storage mode, group 1808 provides power to the control, and also supplies power to the other parts of the master = other than the lost pulse. When the switch is cut off and stops flowing through the switch face, the charge storage module can receive the power supply line 4

祕L了在電荷儲存模組1808令保持特定的充電位準,開關職可以門 ==以=,電瓣模組18G8中。開關18G4可以J 次。這俩鋪失的脈衝也可以作爲 _模組1806接收第-供絲以將遺失脈衝與進入的功 率。=ΐΐ第/5Α圖’遺失脈衝傳送器1820從第一和第二供應線接收功 賺-Γ傳選擇性地經由第一和第二導體向可控制裝置 力率。退失脈衝傳送器1820可以經由任何-個導體或兩個導體 59 200835882 來向可控制裝置1602-1傳送遺失脈衝。 在第35B圖中,遺失脈衝傳送器腦包括:開關1822、與控制模組 1824。開關1822接收第一和第二供應線之一。開關1822選擇性地允許來 自供應線的功補由關達可控雛置蠢4。__觀腦從第一 ^第二供應線接收功率’並且控制開關體的操作。經由在遺失脈衝發射 器1820中的到第一和第二供應線的連接向主控制器woo-丨的其他零件傳送 功率。 現在參考第36A和細B ’其提供了典範可控制裝置的功能方塊圖。 在第36A目中’可控制裝置·包括:遺失脈衝接收器祕裝置控制 模組1642、負載16〇4、以及調降器模組臟。僅為了舉例目的顯示^ 失脈衝計數器和裝置控制模組1642之間的兩個連接。 所述兩個連接可以分縣載神和控㈣料。所職置觸模組⑽ 控制調降H觀膽_作。珊H做膽_纽貞載膽的平均 功率。雖然在帛36A圖中未示出,但是可鋪裝置簡可以包括··參數控 制模組1646及/或電腦介面1648,如同於第3〇圖中所示。 / " 在第36B圖中,可控制裝置192〇包括:遺失脈衝收發器1922、裝置 控継組脱2、可中斷調降器模組1924、以及負載·。可帽調降器模 組1924可▲以對於輸入電塵波形(諸如第31圖的電驗形17⑻的個別脈 衝切斷。這個功能被遺失脈衝收發器1922控制。 …遺失脈衝收發器1922可以藉由指示可中斷調降器模組1924對於電壓 波形1700的和疋脈衝至少部分地切斷而向主鋪器麵傳送資料。這個 動作=被主控制器刪-i的接收器/電流伽器1622觀察為··由可 調降器模組聰中斷的那些脈衝的電流中降低。以這種 置1920和主控制器獅-1之間的雙向通信是可能的。 裝 現在參考第37圖,其提供典範裝置控讎組的功财塊圖 置控制模組1642包括電源195〇,其向裝置控制模組1642的零件供電。電 =950可以包括蝴帛直流電源,並且可讀實現在遺失麟接收器购 或m失脈衝收發器1922中。 200835882 袭置控制模組1642也從遺失脈衝接收器1644 =控制麟。·_料被細:計時值鱗 贿^1952贿要由物咖使關值 行。當計ώ ί _被首次接通時’計時器簡開始運 向位準值贿純1954值^健存她1952財的第—咖,計時器 居存挺立1954傳送遞增信號。所述遞增信號 觸應當選擇下一個位準值。 《〜虎^位準值儲存模組 控制從轉賴械組1954魏馳準蝴齡1958。位準The secret L is in the charge storage module 1808 to maintain a specific charging level, the switch can be gated == to =, in the electric valve module 18G8. Switch 18G4 can be used J times. These two missed pulses can also be used as a _module 1806 to receive the first-supply to lose the pulse and the incoming power. = ΐΐ /5 ’ ' ' Lost pulsator 1820 receives power from the first and second supply lines selectively to the controllable device via the first and second conductors. The lost pulse transmitter 1820 can transmit a missing pulse to the controllable device 1602-1 via any one conductor or two conductors 59 200835882. In Figure 35B, the lost pulse transmitter brain includes a switch 1822 and a control module 1824. Switch 1822 receives one of the first and second supply lines. Switch 1822 selectively allows the compensation from the supply line to be fooled by the Guanda controllable. The brain receives power from the first & second supply line and controls the operation of the switch body. Power is transferred to other parts of the main controller woo-丨 via connections to the first and second supply lines in the lost pulse transmitter 1820. Reference is now made to section 36A and detail B' which provides a functional block diagram of a model controllable device. In the 36th item, the controllable device includes: the lost pulse receiver device control module 1642, the load 16〇4, and the downcomer module are dirty. The two connections between the off-pulse counter and the device control module 1642 are shown for illustrative purposes only. The two connections can be divided into counties and controlled (four) materials. The positional touch module (10) controls the downshift H. Shan H is the average power of the gallbladder. Although not shown in Figure 36A, the device can include a parameter control module 1646 and/or a computer interface 1648, as shown in Figure 3. / " In Fig. 36B, the controllable device 192A includes: a lost pulse transceiver 1922, a device control group, an interruptible resetter module 1924, and a load. The cap configurator module 1924 can be ▲ turned off for input electrical dust waveforms (such as the individual pulses of the electrical pattern 17 (8) of Figure 31. This function is controlled by the lost pulse transceiver 1922. ... the lost pulse transceiver 1922 can borrow The data is transmitted to the main deck by at least partially cutting off the chirp pulse of the voltage interruptable waveform module 1700 by the interruptible interrupter module 1924. This action = the receiver/current galvanometer 1622 deleted by the main controller Observed as the decrease in the current of those pulses interrupted by the adjustable drop-down module Cong. It is possible to use the two-way communication between the 1920 and the main controller lion-1. The power block diagram control module 1642 providing the exemplary device control group includes a power supply 195〇, which supplies power to the parts of the device control module 1642. The electric=950 can include a butterfly DC power supply, and can be read and implemented in the lost Lin reception. The device purchase or m loss pulse transceiver 1922. 200835882 Attack control module 1642 also from the lost pulse receiver 1644 = control Lin. · _ material is fine: timing value scale bribe ^1952 bribe to be turned off by the coffee When ώ ί _ was first switched on 'The timer Jane began to sell to the standard value of 1954 value ^ Jiancang her 1952 money - coffee, the timer is standing upright 1954 transmission increment signal. The incremental signal touch should choose the next level value. Tiger's standard value storage module control from the transfer to the group 1954 Wei Chi quasi-female age 1958.

1^24減^操作關獅、調降器模組19G2、或可中斷調降器 ^ 4準控制扠組1958可以在接通切斷之間選擇,或可以選槎在接、甬切 的度位準。t時值儲存模組1952和位準值儲存模組195^可 匕糟一1入的控制信號選擇的硬編碼的或預先程式規劃的内定值。 匕們也可以經由輸入的控制信號而接收時間和位準值資料。 在計時值儲存模組1952和位準值儲存模組1954令存在的儲存詈決定 負載控=特性能夠有多複雜。在各種實現方式t ’位準值儲存模組刪對 於在計時2鱗歓1952巾鱗鑛雜置包含_贿存位置。以這種方 式’由計時器1956跟蹤的每個時間期間對應於在位準值儲存模組195 的一個位準。 狀現在參考第38圖,其提供典範安裝程式規劃器之功能方塊圖。所述安 褒程式規畫!1器2002彳以用於在安裝可控制裝i 16〇2之前、將值程式規劃 =可控制裝置1602中。所述安裝程式規劃器2002可以用於程式規劃經由 遺失脈衝接收資料的可控制裝置,而無須安裝可以傳送遺失脈衝的燈開 關。女裝程式規劃器2002也可以用於對可以藉由切換燈開關而被程式規劃 的可控制裝置進行程式規劃。 例如’如果可控制裝置1602包括燈泡,則安裝程式規劃器2〇〇2可以 在燈泡被旋進插座中之前向燈泡中儲存參數。被程式規劃到可控制裝置 1602中的參數可以包括時間和強度。例如,可控制裝置16〇2可以被程式規 劃來在100%的強度接通一個小時,過渡到50%的強度達到另一個小時,然 61 200835882 後切斷。-旦絲了可_裝置腿,射以藉由經由鮮燈關而供恭 來啓動這個糾。-旦職織置画6縣油小時紐鴻,則= 切換燈開關以重啓所述照明序列。 在其他示例中,用於要被安裝在廚房中的可控制裝置的一組參數可以 包括·在100%強度接通兩個小時,接著是較小的強度(諸如概)一個小 時。在另-個示例中,用於在浴室内的安裝可控制震置的一組參數包括’:、 在100%強度接通15分鐘,接著是較小的強度(諸如40%) 15分鐘。· 安裝程式規劃器2002可以將複數個參數組程式規劃到可控制裝置16〇2 中。-旦安裝了可控制裝置1602,則可以藉由以預定樣式切換有關的燈開 關來選擇這些參數組。例如,藉由接通燈開關來向可控制裝置16〇2供電可 以選擇第一組參數。將燈開關接通、切斷然後迅速再接通可以選擇第'二組 參數。將燈開關迅速連續地接通、切斷、接通、切斷、以及接通可以選擇 第三組參數。在上面更詳細地描述了其他切換設計,以及可以用於選擇參 數組。 > 除了對了控制裝置1602進行程式規劃之外,安裝程式規劃器2002還 能夠讀取可控做置臟的目前程式規赚態。這可峨後翻示到使用 者,或被,存在安裝程式規劃器2002中。如果被儲存,則可以使用所述程 式規劃狀恝來程式規劃其他可控制裝置。例如,如果可控制裝置16〇2故障, 則可以購胃新的可控織置,並且將其料規綱同—程式規劃狀態。 安裝程式規劃器2002包括遺失脈衝傳送器2004。遺失脈衝傳送器2〇〇4 從一個或更多個供應線接收功率,並且向可控制裝置16〇2提供功率。如上 所述,运失脈衝傳送器2004可以藉由暫時中斷或縮減到可控制裝置16〇2 的功率流來向可控制裝置1602傳送資料。電源2006從供應線接收功率, 並且向安裝程式規劃器2002的零件提供功率。 这失脈衝傳送器2004能夠中斷到可控制裝置16〇2的功率達大於電源 信號的一個周期的時間。以這種方式,遺失脈衝傳送器2〇〇4可以用於産生 與由使用者藉由切換燈開關而產生的那些類似的接通切斷序列。這允許安 裝程式規劃器2002對包括程式規劃模組的可控制裝置進行程式規劃,所述 62 200835882 程式規劃模组諸如是第13圖的程式規劃模組754、第14圖的程式規劃模組 804、以及第16圖的程式規劃模組904。 安裝程式規劃器2002包括控制模組2010。控制模組2010向遺失脈衝 傳送器2004傳送資料,遺失脈衝傳送器2004然後將資料編碼在被傳送到 可控制裝置1602的功率信號上。控制模組2010根據使用者輸入,以決定 要傳送到可控制裝置1602的資料。可以從使用者輸入模組2014接收使用 者輸入。1^24 minus ^ operation Guanshi, descending module 19G2, or interruptible downregulator ^ 4 quasi-control fork set 1958 can be selected between on and off, or can be selected in the degree of picking, cutting Level. The t-time value storage module 1952 and the level value storage module 195 can eliminate the hard-coded or pre-programmed default values selected by the control signal. We can also receive time and level data via the input control signal. The chrono value storage module 1952 and the level value storage module 1954 cause the existing storage 詈 to determine how complex the load control = characteristic can be. In various implementations, the t' level storage module is deleted for the chronograph 2 scale 1952 towel scale miscellaneous inclusion _ bribe position. Each time period tracked by the timer 1956 in this manner corresponds to a level at the level value storage module 195. Referring now to Figure 38, a functional block diagram of the exemplary installer planner is provided. The amp program is used to program the value program = controllable device 1602 before installing the controllable device. The installer planner 2002 can be used to program a controllable device that receives data via lost pulses without having to install a light switch that can transmit missing pulses. The women's program planner 2002 can also be used to program programs for controllable devices that can be programmed by switching light switches. For example, if the controllable device 1602 includes a light bulb, the installer planner 2〇〇2 can store parameters into the light bulb before the light bulb is screwed into the socket. The parameters programmed into the controllable device 1602 can include time and intensity. For example, the controllable device 16〇2 can be programmed to turn on at 100% intensity for one hour, transition to 50% intensity for another hour, and then cut off after 200835882. - Once the silk is available, the legs can be mounted, and the shot is initiated by the Christines through the fresh light. - Once the 6th County Oil Hours are painted, then = switch the light switch to restart the lighting sequence. In other examples, a set of parameters for a controllable device to be installed in the kitchen may include: two hours at 100% intensity, followed by a small intensity (such as one) for one hour. In another example, a set of parameters for the controllable vibrating installation in the bathroom includes ':, 15 minutes at 100% intensity, followed by 15 minutes at a lower intensity (such as 40%). The installer planner 2002 can program a plurality of parameter sets into the controllable device 16〇2. Once the controllable device 1602 is installed, these parameter sets can be selected by switching the associated lamp switches in a predetermined pattern. For example, the first set of parameters can be selected by powering on the light switch to power the controllable device 16〇2. The second set of parameters can be selected by turning the light switch on, off and then quickly turning it back on. The third set of parameters can be selected by quickly turning the light switch on, off, on, off, and on. Other switching designs are described in more detail above and can be used to select a parameter array. > In addition to program planning for the control device 1602, the installer planner 2002 can also read the current program rules for controllable dirtying. This can be flipped back to the user, or left, in the installer planner 2002. If it is stored, the program plan can be used to program other controllable devices. For example, if the controllable device 16〇2 fails, a new controllable weaving of the stomach can be purchased, and its material specification is the same as the program planning state. The installer planner 2002 includes a lost pulse transmitter 2004. The lost pulse transmitter 2〇〇4 receives power from one or more supply lines and provides power to the controllable device 16〇2. As described above, the lost pulse transmitter 2004 can transmit data to the controllable device 1602 by temporarily interrupting or reducing the power flow to the controllable device 16〇2. Power supply 2006 receives power from the supply line and provides power to the parts of the installer planner 2002. This out-of-pulse transmitter 2004 is capable of interrupting the time until the power of the controllable device 16〇2 is greater than one cycle of the power supply signal. In this manner, the lost pulse transmitter 2〇〇4 can be used to generate an on-off sequence similar to those produced by the user by switching the light switch. This allows the installer planner 2002 to program the controllable devices including the program planning module, such as the program planning module 754 of FIG. 13 and the program planning module 804 of FIG. And the program planning module 904 of FIG. The installer planner 2002 includes a control module 2010. The control module 2010 transmits the data to the lost pulse transmitter 2004, which then encodes the data on the power signal that is transmitted to the controllable device 1602. The control module 2010 determines the data to be transferred to the controllable device 1602 based on user input. User input can be received from the user input module 2014.

僅作為例子,使用者輸入模組2014可以包括單個按紐。一旦可控制裝 置1602連接到安裝程式規劃器2002,則可以按下所述按鈕。在各種其他實 現方式中,使用者輸入模組2〇14可以包括複數個按鈕,每個對應於要儲存 到可控制裝置16〇2的一組參數。使用者輸入模組2〇14可以用於從非揮發 性記憶體2022選擇一組參數,而程式規劃至可控制裝置16〇2中。 使用者輸入模組2014還可以允許使用者指定值,諸如強度和時間,以 程式規劃到可控制裝置1602中。由使用者輸入的值或在非揮發性記憶體 2022中儲存的值可以被顯示在顯示器2〇18上。在各種實現方式中,電腦介 面2026可以與電腦、手持裝置等通信。控制模組2〇1〇可以經由電腦介面 2026來接收要儲存到可控制裝置1602的參數。 從電腦介面2026和使用者輸入模組2014接收的值可以被儲存在非揮 ,性記憶體2022中以供未來使用。安裝程式規劃器2〇〇2還可以包括接收 器/電流細器觸,t眺流細器麵接收㈣失脈衝傳送器2_ 到可控制裝置1602的功率信號。 可控制裝置16G2可以藉由中斷可控制裝置臟的功率消耗,以 衣程式規劃器2002傳送資訊。這個功率雜中斷被接收器/電流债測器胸 細到。、可控制裝置1602可以例如向安裝程式規劃器2〇〇2提供 的-個或更多個參數組。控制模組2_可以將這些組 發性 記憶體2022中以供未來使用。 兩糊非揮發性 ,可以各種形式執行本發明 本發明之真魏ffi不應如此 由以上說明習此技術人士現在可以瞭解 廣泛之教示。因此,雖然本發明包括特定例, 63 200835882 文限。這是由於在研讀說明書、此等圖式、以及以下申請專例範圍後,其 他之t正對於熟習此技術人士而言為明顯。 、 【圖式簡單說明】 f1圖為,據習知技術的照明系統之功能方塊圖; ^圖至第5圖為根據本發明原理的典範電照明系統之功能方塊圖; ^ 6圖為根據本發明的原理的典範可控制燈泡的功能方塊圖; # 7圖為根據本發明的原理的典範可控制調整器的功能方塊圖; ,8圖為根據本發明的原理的典範可控制燈具的功能方塊圖; f 9圖至第18圖為根據本^^明的原理的典範控制器的功能方塊圖; f 19圖至第20圖為根據本發明的原理的典範程式規劃模組的功能方塊圖; 第21圖為用於指示典範電源提供存在和不存在序列和有關的指令的一組典 範表格; 第22圖為描述使用者在啓動在程式規劃模組中的程式規劃令執行的典範步 驟的流程圖; 第3圖為為述私式規劃模組在允許使用者程式規劃輸入中的典範操作的流 程圖; ^ 24圖至第26圖為描述由使用者實施的典範程式規劃操作的流程圖; 第27圖為執行第26圖的程式規劃操作的典範程式規劃模組的功能概要圖; 第28圖至第29圖為描述程式規劃模組在允許使用者程式規劃輸入中的典 範操作的流程圖; 第30圖至第30B圖為根據本發日月的原理的典範可程式規劃負餘制系統的 功能方塊圖; 第31A圖至第31D圖根據本發明的原理之遺失脈衝傳輸; 第32圖說明根據本發明的原理的典範使用者介面; 第33A ®至第33C圖為根據本發明的原理的典範參數控纖組的功能方塊 圖; 第34A酿第35A圖為根據本發明的原理的遺失脈衝傳送器的典範佈線組 64 200835882 態的功能方塊圖; 第34B圖與第35B圖為根據本發明的原理的典範遺失脈衝傳送器的功能方 塊圖; ,36A圖至第36B圖為根據本發a月的原理的典範可控制裝置的功能方塊圖; ,37圖為根據本發明的原理的典範裝置控制模組的功能方塊圖;以及 第38圖為根據本發明的原理的典範安裝程式規劃器的功能方塊圖。 【主要元件符號說明】For example only, the user input module 2014 may include a single button. Once the controllable device 1602 is connected to the installer planner 2002, the button can be pressed. In various other implementations, the user input module 2〇14 can include a plurality of buttons, each corresponding to a set of parameters to be stored to the controllable device 16〇2. The user input module 2〇14 can be used to select a set of parameters from the non-volatile memory 2022, and the program is programmed into the controllable device 16〇2. The user input module 2014 may also allow the user to specify values, such as strength and time, to program into the controllable device 1602. The value entered by the user or the value stored in the non-volatile memory 2022 can be displayed on the display 2〇18. In various implementations, computer interface 2026 can communicate with a computer, handheld device, or the like. The control module 2〇1〇 can receive parameters to be stored in the controllable device 1602 via the computer interface 2026. Values received from computer interface 2026 and user input module 2014 may be stored in non-volatile memory 2022 for future use. The installer planner 2〇〇2 may also include a receiver/current slurger, and the t眺-fluid face receives (4) the un-pulsed transmitter 2_ to the controllable device 1602. The controllable device 16G2 can transmit information to the clothing planner 2002 by interrupting the controllable power consumption of the device. This power miscellaneous interrupt is reached by the receiver/current debt detector. The controllable device 1602 can, for example, provide one or more parameter sets to the installer planner 2〇〇2. The control module 2_ can be used in these sets of memory 2022 for future use. The two pastes are non-volatile and can be carried out in various forms. The present invention is not to be so exemplified by the above description. Thus, although the invention includes a specific example, 63 200835882. This is due to the fact that after studying the specification, these drawings, and the scope of the application specifics below, other t is obvious to those skilled in the art. F1 is a functional block diagram of a lighting system according to the prior art; ^ to 5 is a functional block diagram of a typical electric lighting system according to the principles of the present invention; ^ 6 is based on the present A functional block diagram of a light bulb can control a functional block diagram of a light bulb; #7 is a functional block diagram of a exemplary controllable adjuster in accordance with the principles of the present invention; and FIG. 8 is a functional block of a exemplary controllable light fixture in accordance with the principles of the present invention. Figure 9 is a functional block diagram of a typical controller according to the principles of the present invention; f 19 to 20 are functional block diagrams of a typical programming module in accordance with the principles of the present invention; Figure 21 is a set of exemplary tables for indicating the presence and absence of sequences and related instructions for a typical power supply; Figure 22 is a flow for describing exemplary steps performed by a user in starting a program planning order in a programming module. Figure 3 is a flow chart showing the exemplary operation of the private planning module in allowing the user to program the input; ^ 24 to 26 are diagrams describing the exemplary program operation performed by the user. Figure 27 is a functional overview of the exemplary programming module for performing the program planning operation of Figure 26; Figures 28 through 29 are diagrams describing the exemplary operation of the programming module in allowing user program programming input. FIG. 30 to FIG. 30B are functional block diagrams of a exemplary programmable negative system according to the principles of the present day and the month; FIGS. 31A to 31D illustrate lost pulse transmission according to the principles of the present invention; Figure 32 illustrates a typical user interface in accordance with the principles of the present invention; Figures 33A through 33C are functional block diagrams of exemplary parameter control groups in accordance with the principles of the present invention; Figure 34A, Figure 35A is a diagram in accordance with the present invention. A schematic block diagram of a lost pulse transmitter of the principle 64. A functional block diagram of the state of 200835882; Figures 34B and 35B are functional block diagrams of a typical lost pulse transmitter in accordance with the principles of the present invention; FIGS. 36A through 36B are Functional block diagram of an exemplary controllable device according to the principles of the present invention; 37 is a functional block diagram of a typical device control module in accordance with the principles of the present invention; and FIG. 38 is a A model of the installation program planner functional block diagram of the principle of Ming. [Main component symbol description]

102 104 106 108 202 203 204 206 208 250 252 254 3〇〇 302 350 4〇〇 402 404 406102 104 106 108 202 203 204 206 208 250 252 254 3〇〇 302 350 4〇〇 402 404 406

服務面板 開關 燈具 燈泡 服務面板 電氣分配線 開關 燈具 可控制燈泡 電力線載體控制模組 可控制燈泡 行動裝置 可控制燈具 燈泡 可控制調整器 可控制燈泡 光產生元件 控制器 電子開關 65 200835882 408 半透明殼體 450 可控制調整器 452 控制器 454 電子開關 500 可控制燈具 502 控制器 504 電子開關 550 控制器 552 計時器 600 控制器 602 電力線載體接收器 650 控制器 652 計時器 654 使用者輸入裝置 656 移動感測模組 700 控制器 702 電力線載體接收器 704 變光開關 750 控制器 752 計時器 754 程式規劃模組 800 控制器 802 電力線載體接收器 804 程式規劃模組 850 控制器 852 電力線載體收發器 854 非揮發性記憶體 900 控制器Service panel switch lamp bulb service panel electrical distribution line switch lamp controllable bulb power line carrier control module controllable bulb mobile device controllable lamp bulb controllable adjuster control bulb light generating component controller electronic switch 65 200835882 408 translucent housing 450 Controllable Regulator 452 Controller 454 Electronic Switch 500 Controllable Lamp 502 Controller 504 Electronic Switch 550 Controller 552 Timer 600 Controller 602 Power Line Carrier Receiver 650 Controller 652 Timer 654 User Input Device 656 Motion Sensing Module 700 Controller 702 Power Line Carrier Receiver 704 Dimmer Switch 750 Controller 752 Timer 754 Program Planning Module 800 Controller 802 Power Line Carrier Receiver 804 Program Planning Module 850 Controller 852 Power Line Carrier Transceiver 854 Non-Volatile Memory 900 controller

66 20083588266 200835882

902 電力線載體收發器 904 程式規劃模組 950 控制器 952 計時器 954 唯讀記憶體(ROM) 1000 控制器 1002 電力線載體接收器 1004 唯讀記憶體(ROM) 1050 程式規劃模組 1052 電源 1054 電荷儲存模組 1056 計時模組 1058 微控制器 1060 非揮發性記憶體 1100 程式規劃模組 1102 電荷儲存模組 1104 計時模組 1106 微控制器 1108 非揮發性記憶體 1152、1154、1160、1162、1170、1172 1200、1202、1204、1206、1208、1210、1212 1300、1302、1304、1306、1308、1310、1312、 1314、1316、1318、1320、1322、1324、1326、 1328、1330、1332、1334、1336、1338、1340 1350、1370、1372 1400、1402、1404、1406 1450 電源 1452 計時模組 表格 步驟 步驟 步驟 步驟 67 200835882 1454 第一電阻器 1456 第一電容器 1458 第一比較器 1460 第一參考電壓產生 1462 第一電晶體 1464 第二電晶體 1466 第二電阻器 1468 第二比較器 1470 第二電容器902 Power Line Carrier Transceiver 904 Program Planning Module 950 Controller 952 Timer 954 Read Only Memory (ROM) 1000 Controller 1002 Power Line Carrier Receiver 1004 Read Only Memory (ROM) 1050 Program Planning Module 1052 Power Supply 1054 Charge Storage Module 1056 Timing Module 1058 Microcontroller 1060 Non-volatile Memory 1100 Programming Module 1102 Charge Storage Module 1104 Timing Module 1106 Microcontroller 1108 Non-volatile Memory 1152, 1154, 1160, 1162, 1170, 1172 1200, 1202, 1204, 1206, 1208, 1210, 1212 1300, 1302, 1304, 1306, 1308, 1310, 1312, 1314, 1316, 1318, 1320, 1322, 1324, 1326, 1328, 1330, 1332, 1334, 1336, 1338, 1340 1350, 1370, 1372 1400, 1402, 1404, 1406 1450 Power Supply 1452 Timing Module Table Steps Steps Step 67 200835882 1454 First Resistor 1456 First Capacitor 1458 First Comparator 1460 First Reference Voltage Generation 1462 first transistor 1464 second transistor 1466 second resistor 1468 second comparator 1470 second capacitor

1472 第二參考電壓產生器 1474 鎖定器 1476 延遲模組 1500 方法 1508、1512、1516、1520、1524 步驟 1550 方法 1552、1554、1556、1558、1560、1562、1564、 1566、1568、1570、1572、1574、1576、1578、1580 步驟 1600 主控制器1472 second reference voltage generator 1474 lock 1476 delay module 1500 method 1508, 1512, 1516, 1520, 1524 step 1550 methods 1552, 1554, 1556, 1558, 1560, 1562, 1564, 1566, 1568, 1570, 1572 1574, 1576, 1578, 1580 Step 1600 Master Controller

1600-1、-2 主控制器 1602 可控制裝置 1602-1、-2、-3可控制裝置 1602-A1、-A2可控制裝置 1602-AX、1602-B1、1602-B2、1602-BX 可控制裝置 1604 負載 1606-1、-2 電力線載體控制模組 1608-1、-2 行動裝置 1610 使用者介面 1612 遺失脈衝傳送器 68 2008358821600-1, -2 main controller 1602 controllable devices 1602-1, -2, -3 controllable devices 1602-A1, -A2 controllable devices 1602-AX, 1602-B1, 1602-B2, 1602-BX Control device 1604 load 1606-1,-2 power line carrier control module 1608-1,-2 mobile device 1610 user interface 1612 lost pulse transmitter 68 200835882

1614 控制模組 1616、 無線介面 1617、1648 電腦介面 1618、1646 參數控制模組 1620 電力線介面 1622 接收器/電流偵測器 1624 電力線介面 1626、1632 使用者介面 1628、1630 無線介面 1640 開關 1642 裝置控制模組 1644 遺失脈衝接收器 1646 參數控制模組 1647 節點 1700 電壓波形 1702 遺失脈衝 1703 正弦波 1704 第二遺失脈衝 1706 第三遺失脈衝 1710-1、-2 角 1712、1714、 1716遺失脈衝 1718-1、-2 參考點 1718-3、-4 參考點 1720 使用者介面 1722-1、-2、 1722-3、-4 按鈕 1750 參數控制模組 1752 變光開關 1760 參數控制模組 69 200835882 1762 分壓器 1770 參數控制模組 1772 非揮發性記憶體 1802 遺失脈衝傳送器 1804 開關 1806 控制模組 1808 電荷儲存模組 1820 遺失脈衝傳送器 1822 開關 1824 控制模組 1900 可控制裝置 1902 調降器模組 1920 可控制裝置 1922 遺失脈衝收發器 1924 調降器模組 1950 電源 1952 、 1954 位準值儲存模組 1956 計時器 1958 位準控制模組 2002 程式規劃器 2004 遺失脈衝傳送器 2006 電源 2010 控制模組 2014 使用者輸入模組 2018 顯示器 2022 非揮發性記憶體 2026 電腦介面 2030 接收器/電流偵測器1614 Control Module 1616, Wireless Interface 1617, 1648 Computer Interface 1618, 1646 Parameter Control Module 1620 Power Line Interface 1622 Receiver / Current Detector 1624 Power Line Interface 1626, 1632 User Interface 1628, 1630 Wireless Interface 1640 Switch 1642 Device Control Module 1644 Loss of Pulse Receiver 1646 Parameter Control Module 1647 Node 1700 Voltage Waveform 1702 Lost Pulse 1703 Sine Wave 1704 Second Lost Pulse 1706 Third Lost Pulse 1710-1, -2 Angle 1712, 1714, 1716 Lost Pulse 1718-1 ,-2 reference point 1718-3,-4 reference point 1720 user interface 1722-1,-2,1722-3,-4 button 1750 parameter control module 1752 dimmer switch 1760 parameter control module 69 200835882 1762 partial pressure 1770 Parameter Control Module 1772 Non-volatile Memory 1802 Lost Pulse Transmitter 1804 Switch 1806 Control Module 1808 Charge Storage Module 1820 Lost Pulse Transmitter 1822 Switch 1824 Control Module 1900 Controllable Device 1902 Downstream Module 1920 Controllable device 1922 lost pulse transceiver 1924 down-regulator module 1950 Power Supply 1952, 1954 Level Storage Module 1956 Timer 1958 Level Control Module 2002 Program Planner 2004 Lost Pulse Transmitter 2006 Power Supply 2010 Control Module 2014 User Input Module 2018 Display 2022 Non-volatile Memory 2026 Computer Interface 2030 Receiver / Current Detector

Claims (1)

200835882 十、申請專利範園: 1 ·一種可控制燈泡,包括: 該可控制燈泡的電性連接器,其接收功率信號; 該可控制燈泡的接收ϋ模組,其籍由經由該電 信號供電,根據該功率信號的接通 且在該功軸號接猶根據該控制參數喊生控制作號. 該可,其輸出—輪出功率信號,並且:據該控制 4吕说而縮減該輸出功率信號; J 該可控制燈泡的半透明殼體;以及200835882 X. Patent application park: 1 · A controllable light bulb, comprising: the electrical connector of the controllable light bulb, which receives a power signal; the control light bulb receiving ϋ module, which is powered by the electrical signal According to the power signal is turned on and the power axis number is connected according to the control parameter, the control signal is given. The output, the power signal is output, and the output power is reduced according to the control. Signal; J the translucent housing that controls the bulb; 該可==恤#,無咖她谢,並且接收該 2·如申请專利範圍第1項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 信號 該接ϋ/切斷調變包括:在預定時間期間上對於功率信號存在和功率 不存在之一的計數。 3·如申ό奮專利範圍第1項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 該接通/切斷調變包括:在週期的取樣期間收集的二進位資料,其中, # 一一進位狀悲對應於功率信號存在,第二二進位狀態對應於功率信號不 存在。 σ〜 4·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 該接通/切斷調變包括··由功率信號存在和功率信號不存在之一的期間決 定的二進位資料,其中,第一二進位狀態對應於比預定長度短的期間, 第二二進位狀態對應於比該預定長度長的期間。 5·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 該接收器模組在該接通/切斷調變指示程式規劃啓動序列後,決定該控制 71 200835882 參數 6·如申請專利範圍第5項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 實施的預定接通/切斷序 該程式賴啓鱗列包括:在預定時間期 列。 7·如申請專利範圍第i項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 當接收到該控制信號時’該電子開關將該輸出功率信號縮減到大約〇。 8 ·如申料纖圍第!撕述之可控繼泡,其中 當接收到該控做號時’該電子_將該^辨信魏朗調降值。 9·如申請專利範圍第!項所述之可控制燈泡,苴中 由該功率㈣接收貧料,與第一位址有, 整體位址之一的命令,J;中,诗㈣,姿私〜⑨又疋址㈣位址和 〃巾該控制參數包括該第—位址,該接收器模 ,、且根據該負料來産生該控制信號。 10 ·如申請專利細第9項所述之可控繼泡,其_ 該電力線載體接收器模組根據該接通/切斷調變而實施操作。 11 ·如申請專利範圍第1G項所述之可控制燈泡,笪中 =操=是重触_作、靖健猶、廣猶接雜、獻傳送位 址#作的至少一個。 12如申睛專利範圍第1項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 έ接收模組更&amp;括§丨8輪組,該計時模組在該功 開始計數’其中,該控制參數包括預定值,其中,當該 72 200835882 該預定值時’該接收賴組纽雜制信號。 13 · 接通的期間來 如申明專利|&amp;圍第12項所述之可控繼泡,其中 在啓動程式規触錢,該触旨· 設定該預錄。 平1〇説 =申明專利範12項所述之可控継泡,其中 ’該接收The controllable light bulb of claim 1, wherein the signal of the interface/cutoff modulation comprises: for power during a predetermined time period; A count of the presence of a signal and the absence of power. 3. The controllable light bulb of claim 1, wherein the on/off modulation comprises: binary data collected during sampling of the period, wherein #一一进状悲 corresponds to The power signal is present, and the second binary state corresponds to the absence of the power signal. Σ〜4· The controllable light bulb of claim 1, wherein the on/off modulation comprises: a binary data determined by a period in which the power signal exists and the power signal does not exist, wherein The first binary state corresponds to a period shorter than a predetermined length, and the second binary state corresponds to a period longer than the predetermined length. 5. The controllable light bulb of claim 1, wherein the receiver module determines the control after the start/stop modulation instruction program planning start sequence 71 200835882 parameter 6 · such as patent application scope The controllable light bulb of item 5, wherein the predetermined on/off sequence implemented by the program includes: a predetermined time period. 7. The controllable light bulb of claim i, wherein the electronic switch reduces the output power signal to approximately 〇 when the control signal is received. 8 ·If the application is fifteen! The controllable secondary bubble is torn, wherein when the control is received, the electronic _ is adjusted to a value. 9. If you apply for a patent scope! The controllable light bulb mentioned in the item, the medium receiving the poor material by the power (4), and the first address, the command of one of the whole addresses, J; the middle, the poem (four), the private position ~ 9 and the address (four) address And the control parameter includes the first address, the receiver mode, and the control signal is generated according to the negative material. 10. The controllable bubble according to claim 9, wherein the power line carrier receiver module operates according to the on/off modulation. 11 · If you can control the light bulb as described in item 1G of the patent application, 笪中=操= is at least one of the re-touch _, Jing Jian, Guang Ju, and delivery address #. [12] The controllable light bulb of claim 1, wherein the έ receiving module further comprises § 丨 8 wheel sets, and the chronograph module starts counting in the work, wherein the control parameter includes a predetermined value, Among them, when the 72 200835882 the predetermined value, the receiver receives the signal. 13 · The period of the connection is as stated in the patent |&amp;; the controllable bubble according to item 12, in which the program is touched, the purpose is set. Ping 1〇 said that the controllable bubble described in the Patent Model 12 is declared, where ^該=時器模組達到該預紐之前、該功率信號被切斷時 斋板組|(5減該預定值。 15 =申清專利範圍第14項所述之可控制燈泡,其令 當在該計時雜組達到該預定值制就時間朗n力率信號被 切斷然後接通時,該接收器模組增加該預定值。 16 ·如申請專利範圍第12項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 备在該计時器模組達到該預定值之前、該功率信號在預定時間期間内 切斷、接通和切斷時,該接收器模組縮減該預定值。 17 ·如申請專利範圍第16項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 當在該計時器模組達到該預定值之後的預定時間期間内、該功率信號 切斷、接通、切斷、以及接通時,該接收器模組增加該預定值。 18 ·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 該電性連接器包括導電陽螺紋和導電尖端。 19 ·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之可控制燈泡,其中 該光産生元件包括金屬燈絲。 73 200835882 20 · —種方法,包括·· 在燈泡處接收功率信號; 監控該功率信號的接通/切斷調變; 根據該接通/切斷調變而決定控制來數· 當該功率信號接通時,根據該控制參數而産生控制信號; 向該燈泡的光産生元件提供輸出功率信號,·以及 根據該控制信號而縮減該輸出功率信號二 21 ·如申請專利範圍第20項所述之方法,其中 該監控包括:在預定時間期_上對功物號存在和功率信號不存在之# 一進行計數。 22 ·如申請專利範圍第20項所述之方法,其中 $監控包括以週期的取樣細收集二進位資料,其中,第一二進位狀 態對應於功率信號存在,第二二進位狀態對應於功率信號不存在。 23 ·如申請專利範圍第20項所述之方法,其中 =監控包括藉由測量神信號存在和神魏不存在之_的期間來收 進位f料,其巾,第-二進位絲縣於比就紐崎期間, 第一二進位狀態對應於比該預定長度長的期間。 馨 24如申請專利範圍第2〇項所述之方法,更包括: 在執行該決定之前從該接通/切斷調變偵測程式規劃啓動序列。 25 ·如申請專利範圍第24項所述之方法,其中 忒転式規劃啓動序列包括:在預定時間期間内偵測的預定接通/切斷序 74 200835882 26 27 28 29 30 如申凊專利範圍第20項所述之方法,更包括: ^接收__糾,職輸_信魏峋調_切斷值之 如申睛專利範圍第20項所述之方法,更包括: 接收該功率信號上重疊的資料; 將該資料解碼為複數個命令; 選擇該命令中定址第一位址和整體位址之一的 數包括該第一位址;以及 7,其中,該控制參 根據該等等命令之一些來産生該控制信號。 如申凊專利範圍第27項所述之方法,更包括:根據該接11/_喔綠行電力線健操作,其巾,鞠作是重、址操作、更新紐猶、舰連接操作、以及傳送位址操作的至 個。 如申請專利範圍第20項所述之方法,更包括: 在接收到該功率信號後開始對第—期間進行計時,其中,該控制參數 包括該第-綱,其巾,當該第—綱過去時,實施該産生該控制信凌。 .如申請專利範圍第29項所述之方法,更包括:在啓動程式規纖級,根翻功率概接賴綱,來設定該第一 期間。 •如申請專利範圍第29項所述之方法,更包括: 當在該第一期間過去之前切斷該功率信號時,縮減該第一期間。 75 31 200835882 32 ·如申請專利範圍第31項所述之方法,更包括· 當在該第-綱過去後的預定時間期間内, 通時,增加該第一期間。 ^率信號被切斷然後接 間内切斷、接通 33 ·如申請專利範園第29項所述之方法,更包括. 當在該第-期間過去之前、該功率信號在預 和切斷時,縮減該第一期間。 34 ·如申請專利範圍第33項所述之方法,更包括. 接 當在已經執行了該縮減之後的預定時間期間内' 通、切斷、以及接通時,增加該第一期間。“功率信號切斷、 35 · —種可控制燈泡調整器,包括: 該可控制燈泡調整器的第-電性連接器,其從燈 該可控制燈泡調整器的接收器模組,其藉由經由 波, 收的該轉親供電,根據該辨銶 當該功率信號接通時,根據該控制參 == 該可控制燈泡調整器的電子開關,其輸出一輪出功率 該控制信細賴該触神錄;以及 亚且根據 射===號第?電性連接器’其容納燈泡,並— 36 ·如申請專利範圍第35項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接^切_變包括:在預定__上對^率慨存在 號不存在之一的計數。 手 37 ·如申請專利範圍第35項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 76 200835882 2接通/切斷調變包括:在週期的取樣期間收集的二進位資料,其 一進錄麟應於功率域存在,第二二進錄態對應於功 號不存在。 ό 38 ·如申請專利範圍第35項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接通/切_變包括由功率信號存在和功率信號不存在之—的期 定的二進位資料,其中,第一二進位狀態對應於比預定長度短的期^ 第一二進位狀態對應於比該預定長度長的期間。 瞻 39 ·如申凊專利範圍第35項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接收益模組在該接通/切斷調變指示程式規劃啓動序列後決定該控制 參數。 40 ·如申請專利範圍第39項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 该程式規劃啓動序列包括:在預定時間期間内執行的預定接通/切斷序 列。 41 ·如申請專利範圍第35項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 φ 當接收到該控制信號時,該電子開關將該輸出功率信號縮減到大約〇。 42 ·如申請專利範圍第35項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 當接收到該控制信號時,該電子開關將該輸出功率信號縮減到調降值。 43 ·如申請專利範圍第35項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接收器模级包括電力線載體接收器模組,該電力線載體接收器模組 經由該功率信號接收資料,與第一位址有關,並且接受定址為該第一 位址和整體位址之一的命令,其中,該控制參數包括該第一位址,該 接收器模組根據該資料來産生該控制信號。 77 200835882 44 45 46 47 - 48 · 49 . •如申請專利範圍第43項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該電力線载體接收器模組根據該接通/切斷調變而實施操作。 如申請專利範圍第44項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該操作是重設位址操作、更新位址操作、廣播連接操作、以及傳送位 址操作的至少一個。 如申睛專利範圍第35項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接收器模組更包括計時模組,該計時模組在該功率信號被接收到後 開始計數,其甲,該控制參數包括預定值,以及其中當該計時模組達 到該預定值時,該接收器模組産生該控制信號。 如申凊專利範圍第46項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其令 在啓動程式規劃模式後,該接收器模組根據該功率信號接通的期間來 設定該預定值。 如申請專利範圍第46項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 虽在該什時器模組達到該預定值之前、該功率信號被切斷時,該 斋才果組縮減該預定值。 如申睛專利範圍第48項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 當在該計時器模組達到該預定值後的預定時間期間内、該功率信 切斷然後接通時,該接收器模組增加該預定值。 化子 如申請專利範圍第46項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 畲在該計時器模組達到該就值之前、該功率職在預树 切斷、接通、以及切斷時,該接收器模組縮減該預定值。/曰内 78 50 . 200835882 51 ·如申請專利範圍第5〇項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 當在該計時器模組達到該預定值之後的預定時間期間内、該功率信號 切斷、接通、切斷、以及接通時,該接收器模組增加該預定值。 52 ·如申請專利範圍第35項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該第一電性連接器包括導電陽螺紋和導電尖端,其中,該第二電性連 接器包括導電陰螺紋和導電觸點。 書 53 · -種方法,包括: 從燈具接收功率信號; 監控該功率信號的接通/切斷調變; 根據該接通/切斷調變而決定控制參數; 當該功率信號接通時,根據該控制參數而産生控制信號; 向燈泡提供輸出功率信號;以及 口 根據该控制信號而縮減該輸出功率信號。 54 ·如申請專利範圍第53項所述之方法,其中 • f在預定時間期間上對辨信號存在和功率信號不存在之 55 ·如申請專利範圍第53項所述之方法,其中 該監控包括以週期的取樣期間收隼— 態對應於功率信號存在,第二二;斗’其中’第一二進位狀 環佼狀恶對應於功率信號不存在。 56 ·如申請專利範圍第53項所述之方法, 信號存在和功率信號不存在之一的門、β亥監控包括藉由測篁功率 第一二進位狀態對應於比預定長度短;^集;進位資料,其中 町屑間,弟二二進位狀態對應於 79 200835882 比該預定長度長的期間。 57 58 59 60 61 如申睛專利範圍第53項所述之方法,更包括: 在執行該決定之前從該接通/切斷調變偵測程式規劃啓動序列。 •如申請專利範圍第57項所述之方法,其中 該知式規劃啓動序列包括在預定時間期間内偵測的預定接通/切斷序 列。 •如申請專利範圍第53項所述之方法,更包括: 鲁 虽接收到該控制信號時,將該輸出功率信號縮減到調降值和切斷值之 —~ 〇 •如申請專利範圍第53項所述之方法,更包括: 接收在該功率信號上重疊的資料; 將該資料解碼為複數個命令; 選擇該命竹紐第-位址和魏位址之—的命令,其巾,雜制參 數包括該第一位址;以及^ The = when the timer module reaches the pre-news, the power signal is cut off when the board is set to | (5 minus the predetermined value. 15 = the clearable control bulb described in claim 14 of the patent scope, The receiver module increases the predetermined value when the timing group reaches the predetermined value and the signal is cut and then turned on. 16 · The controllable light bulb as described in claim 12 The receiver module reduces the predetermined value when the power signal is turned off, on, and off within a predetermined time period before the timer module reaches the predetermined value. 17 · As claimed The controllable light bulb of item 16, wherein the receiver mode is when the power signal is turned off, on, off, and turned on within a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value The group is increased by the predetermined value. 18. The controllable light bulb of claim 1, wherein the electrical connector comprises a conductive male thread and a conductive tip. 19 · Controllable as described in claim 1 a light bulb, wherein the light generating element comprises Is a filament. 73 200835882 20 · A method, including · receiving a power signal at the bulb; monitoring the on/off modulation of the power signal; determining the number of controls according to the on/off modulation When the power signal is turned on, a control signal is generated according to the control parameter; an output power signal is supplied to the light generating element of the bulb, and the output power signal is reduced according to the control signal. 21 • As claimed in claim 20 The method, wherein the monitoring comprises: counting the presence of a work item number and the absence of a power signal during a predetermined time period. The method of claim 20, wherein the monitoring comprises: The binary data is collected in a periodic sampling, wherein the first binary state corresponds to the presence of the power signal, and the second binary state corresponds to the absence of the power signal. 23 The method of claim 20, wherein = Monitoring includes receiving the material by measuring the existence of the signal of God and the period in which God Wei does not exist, and the towel, the second-in-situ count in Yubi during the period of New Zealand The first binary state corresponds to a period longer than the predetermined length. The method of claim 24, wherein the method of claim 2 includes: switching from the on/off before performing the decision The program according to claim 24, wherein the 规划 plan initiation sequence comprises: a predetermined on/off sequence detected during a predetermined time period 74 200835882 26 27 28 29 30 For example, the method described in claim 20 of the patent scope further includes: ^ receiving __correction, service loss _ letter Wei 峋 _ cutoff value, such as the method described in claim 20 of the scope of the patent, including: Receiving data overlapping on the power signal; decoding the data into a plurality of commands; selecting a number of the first address and the entire address addressed in the command to include the first address; and 7, wherein the control parameter The control signal is generated based on some of the commands. For example, the method described in claim 27 of the patent scope further includes: according to the connection operation of the 11/_喔 green line power line, the towel, the operation, the operation, the update, the ship connection operation, and the transmission The address operation is one. The method of claim 20, further comprising: counting the first period after receiving the power signal, wherein the control parameter includes the first-level, and the towel, when the first-stage At the time, the generation of the control letter is implemented. The method of claim 29, further comprising: setting the first period in the startup program specification level. The method of claim 29, further comprising: reducing the first period when the power signal is turned off before the first period elapses. 75 31 200835882 32 - The method of claim 31, further comprising: increasing the first period during a predetermined time period after the lapse of the first syllabus. The rate signal is cut off and then cut off and turned on in the room. 33. The method described in claim 29 of the patent application, including: when the first period elapses, the power signal is pre-cut and cut off. At the time, the first period is reduced. 34. The method of claim 33, further comprising: adding the first period when the current period of the predetermined time period after the reduction has been performed is turned "on", "off", and "on". "Power signal cut-off, 35" - controllable light bulb adjuster, comprising: the first electrical connector of the controllable light bulb adjuster, the slave receiver module of the controllable light bulb adjuster According to the wave, the power supply is turned on, according to the identification, when the power signal is turned on, according to the control parameter == the electronic switch of the light bulb adjuster can be controlled, and the output of the round output power is controlled by the touch God recorded; and sub-according to the === number of electrical connectors 'which accommodate the bulb, and - 36 · as described in claim 35, the controllable bulb adjuster, wherein the switch _ change Including: counting the number of non-existences on the predetermined __. Hand 37 · The controllable bulb adjuster as described in claim 35, wherein 76 200835882 2 turns on/off the modulation Including: binary data collected during the sampling period of the period, one of the input linings should exist in the power domain, and the second binary recording state corresponds to the absence of the work number. ό 38 · As described in claim 35 Controllable lamp adjuster, where The on/off_change includes a predetermined binary data including the presence of the power signal and the absence of the power signal, wherein the first binary state corresponds to a period shorter than the predetermined length, and the first binary state corresponds to a ratio The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 35, wherein the receiving benefit module determines the start sequence after the on/off modulation indicator program is programmed to start The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 39, wherein the program planning start sequence comprises: a predetermined on/off sequence performed during a predetermined time period. 41. The controllable light bulb adjuster of item 35, wherein when the control signal is received, the electronic switch reduces the output power signal to about 〇. 42. The controllable light bulb according to claim 35 An adjuster, wherein when the control signal is received, the electronic switch reduces the output power signal to a down-regulated value. 43. The controllable light as described in claim 35 a bubble adjuster, wherein the receiver module comprises a power line carrier receiver module, the power line carrier receiver module receiving data via the power signal, related to the first address, and accepting addressing as the first address and the whole A command of one of the addresses, wherein the control parameter includes the first address, and the receiver module generates the control signal according to the data. 77 200835882 44 45 46 47 - 48 · 49 . 43. The controllable light bulb adjuster of item 43, wherein the power line carrier receiver module operates according to the on/off modulation. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 44, wherein The operation is at least one of a reset address operation, an update address operation, a broadcast connection operation, and a transfer address operation. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 35, wherein the receiver module further comprises a timing module, the timing module starts counting after the power signal is received, and the control module The predetermined value is included, and wherein the receiver module generates the control signal when the timing module reaches the predetermined value. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 46, wherein after the program planning mode is activated, the receiver module sets the predetermined value according to a period during which the power signal is turned on. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 46, wherein the predetermined value is reduced when the power signal is cut off before the time-sector module reaches the predetermined value. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 48, wherein the receiver module is turned off and then turned on within a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value. The group increases the predetermined value. A controllable light bulb adjuster as described in claim 46, wherein the power function is before the pre-tree is cut, turned on, and cut off before the timer module reaches the value The receiver module reduces the predetermined value. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 5, wherein the power signal is cut off during a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value. The receiver module increases the predetermined value when it is turned on, off, and turned on. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 35, wherein the first electrical connector comprises a conductive male thread and a conductive tip, wherein the second electrical connector comprises a conductive female thread and a conductive touch point. a method comprising: receiving a power signal from a luminaire; monitoring an on/off modulation of the power signal; determining a control parameter according to the on/off modulation; when the power signal is turned on, Generating a control signal based on the control parameter; providing an output power signal to the bulb; and the port reducing the output power signal based on the control signal. 54. The method of claim 53, wherein the method of determining the presence of a signal and the absence of a power signal during a predetermined time period, and the method of claim 53, wherein the monitoring comprises During the sampling period of the period, the state corresponds to the presence of the power signal, and the second two; the bucket 'where' the first binary loop-shaped evil corresponds to the absence of the power signal. 56. The method according to claim 53, wherein the signal presence and the absence of one of the power signals are monitored, wherein the first binary state corresponds to a shorter than a predetermined length by the test power; The carry-in data, in which the second and second carry positions correspond to the period in which the 2008 200888882 is longer than the predetermined length. 57 58 59 60 61 The method of claim 53, further comprising: planning a start sequence from the on/off modulation detection program prior to performing the decision. The method of claim 57, wherein the knowledge plan initiation sequence comprises a predetermined on/off sequence detected during a predetermined time period. • The method as described in claim 53 of the patent application, further includes: When receiving the control signal, Lu reduces the output power signal to the down-conversion value and the cut-off value — 〇 • as claimed in claim 53 The method of the present invention further includes: receiving data overlapping on the power signal; decoding the data into a plurality of commands; selecting a command of the life-first address and the Wei address, The parameter includes the first address; 根據該等命令之-些,以産生該控制信號。 如申請專利範圍第60項所述之方法,更包括· 根據該接w切斷調絲執行電力線載 . 址操作、更新位址操作、廣播連接麻、…/織作疋重叹位 加〇 〃輯接鱗、从傳敎鱗作的至少- 如申請專利範圍第53項所述之方法,更包括· 第-期間進行計時,針,該控制參數 包綱期間’其中’當該第—綱過去時,實施該産生該控制信 62 · 200835882Based on these commands, the control signal is generated. For example, the method described in claim 60, further includes: performing power line loading, updating address operation, broadcasting connection, .../weaving 疋 叹 〇〃 根据 根据 根据Squaring, at least from the squall scales - as described in claim 53 of the patent scope, including the first period of the period, the needle, the control parameter during the period of 'the' when the first-class past , the implementation of the generation of the control letter 62 · 200835882 63 ·如申請專利範圍第62項所述之方法,更包括: 的期間來設定該第一63. The method of claim 62, further comprising: setting the first 在啓動程式規劃模式後,根據該功率信號接通 間。 64 ·如申請專利範圍第62項所述之方法,更包括: 縮減該第一期間。 當在该第一期間過去之前切斷該功率信號時After the program planning mode is started, the power signal is turned on according to the power signal. 64. The method of claim 62, further comprising: reducing the first period. When the power signal is turned off before the first period elapses 65 ·如申請專利範圍第64項所述之方法,更包括·· 當在該第一期間過去後的預定時間期間内 通時,增加該第一期間。 該功率信號被切斷然後接 66 ·如申請專利範圍第62項所述之方法,更包括: 當在该弟一期間過去之前的預定時 和切斷時,縮減該第一期間。 / 率仏號切斷、接通 67 ·如申請專利範圍第66項所述之方法,更包括:65. The method of claim 64, further comprising: adding the first period when the predetermined period of time after the expiration of the first period is passed. The power signal is cut off and then connected. The method of claim 62, further comprising: reducing the first period when the predetermined period and the cut-off period before the passage of the younger one. / Rate nickname cut-off, switch-on 67 · As described in the patent application scope 66, it also includes: 該功率信號切斷、接 當在已經執行了鞠減之後的賊時關間内, 通、切斷和接通時,增加該第一期間。 68 · —種可控制燈具,包括: =2=1=一!_器,其接收功率信號,· 功率:供電收Γ:力:二::,性連接器接收的該 該可控制麟的電子_,其辨信號,並且根據該控制 81 200835882 &quot;ίέ说而縮減該輸出功率信號;以及 該可控制燈具的第二電性連接器,其容納燈泡,並且向該燈泡提供該 輸出功率信號。 69 ·如申睛專利範圍第68項所述之可控制燈具,其中 雜通/切斷輕包括:在财時間綱上·功率健存在和功率信 號不存在之一的計數。 70 ·如申請專利範圍第68項所述之可控制燈具,其中 該接通/切斷調變包括在週期的取樣期間收集的二進位資料,其中,第 -二進位狀_應於功率信號存在,第二二進位狀態對應於:力率信號 不存在。 71 ·如申請專利範圍第68項所述之可控制燈具,其中 該接通/切斷調變包括由功率信號存在和功率信號不存在之一的期間決 定的二進位資料,其中,第一二進位狀態對應於比預定長度短的期間, 第二二進位狀態對應於比該預定長度長的期間。 72 ·如申請專利範圍第68項所述之可控制燈具,其中 該接收斋模組在該接通/切斷調變指示程式規劃啓動序列後決定該控制 參數。 73 ·如申請專利範圍第72項所述之可控制燈具,其中 該程式規劃啓動序列包括在預定時間期間内執行的預定接通/切斷序 列。 74 ·如申請專利範圍第68項所述之可控制燈具,其中 當接收到該控制信號時,該電子開關將該輸出功率信號縮減到大約〇。 82 200835882 75 ·如申請專利範圍第68 當接收到該鋪信舰具’其令 ▽包子開關將該輸出功率信號縮減到調降值。 76 ·如申請專利細第68項所述之可測燈具, 該接收1§模組包括電为f 八八 經由該功率信號接收資Ϊ栽,接收器模組’該電力線載體接收器模組 址和整體位址之f 一位址有關,並且接受定址該第-位The power signal is cut off, and the first period is increased when the thief is turned off, and turned on and off after the thief has been executed. 68 · A kind of controllable luminaire, including: =2=1=one!_, receiving power signal, · power: power supply: force: two::, the connector can receive the electronic controllable _, which discriminates the signal, and reduces the output power signal according to the control 81 200835882 &quot;έ;; and a second electrical connector of the controllable luminaire that houses the bulb and provides the output power signal to the bulb. 69. The controllable luminaire of claim 68, wherein the miscellaneous/cut-off light comprises: a count of one of the power presence and the absence of a power signal at the time of the financial period. 70. The controllable luminaire of claim 68, wherein the on/off modulation comprises binary data collected during a periodic sampling period, wherein the first-secondary _ is present in the power signal The second binary state corresponds to: the force rate signal does not exist. 71. The controllable luminaire of claim 68, wherein the on/off modulation comprises binary data determined by a period of presence of a power signal and a absence of a power signal, wherein the first two The carry state corresponds to a period shorter than a predetermined length, and the second binary state corresponds to a period longer than the predetermined length. 72. The controllable luminaire of claim 68, wherein the receiving module determines the control parameter after the on/off modulation indicator programming start sequence. 73. The controllable luminaire of claim 72, wherein the program planning start sequence comprises a predetermined on/off sequence performed during a predetermined time period. 74. The controllable luminaire of claim 68, wherein the electronic switch reduces the output power signal to approximately 〇 when the control signal is received. 82 200835882 75 • If the patented scope is received at the 68th, the shackle switch is used to reduce the output power signal to the down-conversion value. 76. The measurable luminaire as described in claim 68, the receiving 1 § module includes a power supply f 八八 via the power signal receiving resource, the receiver module 'the power line carrier receiver module address Relating to the address of the entire address, and accepting the address 收器模組根據該資料來i生二:馳包括該第-位址’該接 77·2ΐίΓ圍第Γ項所述之可控制燈具,其中 1¾、-、載體接收斋模組根據該接通/切斷調變而執行操作。 如申-月專利細第77項所述之可控制燈具,其中 作、技絲麟、祕触麟、《及傳送位 如申明專利範圍弟68項所述之可控制燈具,其中 該接收器模組更包括計時模組,該計時模組在接收到該功率信號後 始计數’其巾’該控制參數包括就值,以及其巾,當該計時模組達 到該預定值時,該接收器模組産生該控制信號。 80如申凊專利範圍第79項所述之可控制燈具,其中 在啓動程式規劃模式後,該接收器模組根據該功率信號接通的期間 設定該預定值。 幻·如申請專利範圍第79項所述之可控制燈具,其中 虽在該计時|§模組達到該預定值之前、該功率信號被切斷時,該接收 83 200835882 器模組縮減該預定值。 82 83 84 85 86 •如申請專利範圍第81項所述之可控制燈具,其中 當在該計時器模組達到該預定值後的預定時間期間中,該功率信號被 切斷然後接通時,該接收器模組增加該預定值。 •如申請專利範圍第79項所述之可控制燈具,其中 · 當在該計時器模組達到該預定值之前、該功率信號在預定時間期間内 切斷、接通、以及切斷時,該接收器模組縮減該預定值。 ^申凊專利範圍第83項所述之可控制燈具,其中 當在該計時器模組達到該預定值之後的預定時間期間内,該功率信號 切斷、接通、切斷和接通時,該接收器模組增加該預定值。 •如申請專利範圍第68項所述之可控制燈具,其中 該電性連接器包括導電陰螺紋和導電觸點。 •一種方法,包括: 在燈具處接收功率信號; 監控該功率信號的接通/切斷調變; 翁 根據該接通/切斷調變而決定控制參數; 當該功率錢接辦,根據馳够_產生㈣信號; 向燈泡提供輸出功率信號;以及 根據該控制信號而縮減該輸出功率信號。 如申請專利範圍第86項所述之方法,其中 在預定時間期間上對功率信號存在和功率信號不存在之 84 87 · 200835882 88 .如申請專利範圍第86項所述之方法,其中 w,財,卜二進位狀 在弟一—進位狀態對應於功率信號不存在。 89 .如申請專利範圍第86項所述之方法,其中 功率信號不存在之—的期間來收 第二二進位狀態對:於:該預一定進長位==:比預定長度短的期間, 90 ·如申請專利範圍第86項所述之方法,更包括: 在執行該決定之前從該接通/切斷調變細程式規劃啓動序列。 91 ·如申請專利範圍第90項所述之方法,其中 =程式規劃啓動序列包括在預定時間期間内偵測的預定接通/切斷序 92 ·如申請專利範圍第86項所述之方法,更包括: §接收到該控制信號時,將該輸出功率_ _ _ · 贝刀午就縮減到調降值和切斷值之 93 如申凊專利範圍第86項所述之方法,更包括·· 接收在該功率信號上重疊的資料; 將該資料解碼為複數個命令; 一些,其中,該控制參 選擇定址第一位址和整體位址之一的該命令的 數包括該第一位址;以及 根據該等命令之一些,來産生該控制信號。 85 200835882 94·如申請專利範圍第刃項 個。 τ廣插連接刼作、以及傳送位址操作的至少一 95·如申請專利細第86項所述之方法,更包括: 在接收到該功率信號後開始 包括該第—朗, 2 _如物,射,驗制參數 制信號。 ,、中,s s亥第一期間過去時,實施該産生該控 96 ·如中請專利細第%項所述之方法,更包括: ^啓動程式規劃模式後,根據該功率信號接通的期間來設定該第一期 97 ·如Μ專利細第95項所述之方法,更包括: 當在該第-編㈣、切__斜,顧該第一期間。 98 .如申請專利範圍第97項所述之方法,更包括: 當在該第-期間過去後的預定時間 通時,增加該第一期間。 力料说被切耐然後接着 99 ·如申請專利範圍第95項所述之方法,更包括: 在該第-期間過去之前,當該功率信號在預定 和切斷時,賴該第一期間。 才間期間内切㉚接通 100 ·如申請專利範圍第99項所述之方法,更包括: 1在已經執行了該縮減之後的預定時間期間内、 切斷、接 通、切斷、以及接通時,增加該第一期間。 旱仏 86 200835882 101 · —種可控制燈泡調整器,包括: 該可控制燈泡調整器的第- 該可控制燈泡調整器的接收器碰,其藉由經由該第一電^哭接 功率信號縣,根_辨信號的接物 对該轉錄麵雜魏㈣參如選擇性地 該可控==整器的電子開關,其輸出一輸出功率信號,並且根據 該控制仏唬而縮減該輸出功率信號;以及 該可控制燈泡調整器的第二電性連接器,其容納 提供該輪出辨錄。 102 .如申清專利範圍第1〇1項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接通/切_變包括在預定時間期間上對於功率信號存在和功率信 號不存在之一的計數。 103 ·如申凊專利範圍第ιοί項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 不存在 該接通/切斯調變包括在週期的取樣期間收集的二進位資料,其中,第 --進位狀您對應於功率信號存在,第二二進位狀態對應於功率信號 104 ·如申請專利範圍第1〇1項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接通/切_變包括由轉錄存在和裤健不存在之—的期間 決疋,-驗請,其中,第_二驗狀騎應於比預定長度短的期 間,第二二進位狀態對應於比該預定長度長的期間。 105 ·如申請專利範圍第1〇1項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接收Is模經在該接通/切斷調變指示程式規劃啓動序列後決定該控 87 200835882 制參數。 106 •如申請專利範圍第105項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 ^程式規_解括在默咖期_執行_定接通/切街序 107 108 •如申請專利範圍第101項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 當接收到該控制信號時,該電子開關將該輸出功率°信麵減到大約0。 •如申請專利範圍第101項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,苴中 f收到該_信麟,該電子關將該輸㈣率信號縮減到調降 109 110 · 111 · 如申請專利範圍第101項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接收器模組包括電力線載體接收ϋ模組,該電力線載體接收器 經由該功率舰接«料,與第—位址錢,並膽受定址該第一'位 址和整體位址之-的命令,其中,該控制參數包括該第_位址, 收器模組根據該資料來產生該控制信號。 供 如申請專利範圍第109項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該電力線載體接收器模組根據該接通/切斷調變而執行操作。 如申睛專利範圍第110項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該操作是纽恤操作、更新紐操作、以及傳送位 址操作的至少一個。 如申请專利範圍第101項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該接收器模組更包括計時模組,該計時模在接收到該功率信號後開 88 112 · 200835882 始計數’其中,該控制參數包括預定值,以及其中,當該計8^模組達 到該預定值時,該接收器模組産生該控制信號。 113 ·如申請專利範圍第112項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 在啓動程式規劃模式後,該接收器模組根據該功率信號接通的 設定該預定值。 ’ 114 ·如申請專利範圍第112項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 t在該計時器模組達到該預定值之前、該功率信^被^斷時,該 馨器模組縮減該預定值。 115 申明專利範圍弟114項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 當在該計時器模組達到該預定值後的預定時間期間中、該功率信 切斷然後接通時,該接收器模組增加該預定值。 116 申切專利範圍第I〗]項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 當,該計時器模組達到該預定值之前,該功率信號在預定時間期間内 切斷、接通和切斷時,該接收器模組縮減該預定值。 • ^ =申明專利範圍第116項所述之可控制燈泡調整器,其中 該計時ϋ模組達_預定值之後_定時__,該功率信號 刀断接通、切斷和接通時,該接收器模組增加該預定值。 118如^請專利範圍第l〇i項所述之可控繼泡調整器,其中 |弟龟〖生連接斋包括導電陽螺紋和導電尖端,以及其中,該第二電 性連接器包括導電陰螺紋和導電接觸。 119 · 一種方法,包括·· 89 200835882 120 121 122 · 123 124 從燈具接收功率信號; 監控該功率信號的接通/切斷調變; 根據該接通/切斷調變而決定控制參數; 當該功率信號接通時,根據該控制參數而產生控制 向燈泡提供輸出功率信號;以及 ^ 根據該控制信號而縮減該輸出功率信號。 如申請專利範圍第119項所述之方法,其中 該監控包括:在鼓_躺上對功率餅u存姊轉魏不存在之 一進行計數。 如申請專利範圍第119項所述之方法,其中 ,監控包括以週期的取樣期間收集二進位資料,其中,第一二進位狀 怨對應於功雜號存在,第二二進錄_應於辨魏不存在。 如申請專利範圍第119項所述之方法,其中 該監控包括藉由·神錢存麵功率信號不存在之-的期間來 收集二進位㈣,其中’第―二進錄於喃定長度短的期 間,第一二進位狀瘗對應於比該預定長度長的期間。 如申請專利範圍第119項所述之方法,更包括: 在執行該蚊之祕該騎/___程錢·動序列。 如申請專利範圍第123項所述之方法,其中 該程式規劃啓動序列包括在預定時間_内偵測的肢接通/切斷序 列。 125 如申請專利範圍第119項所述之方法,更包括: 90 200835882 當接收到該控讎麟,將該輪自辨健縮朗珊值和切斷值之 126 127 · 128 · 129 130 131 如申請專利範圍第119項所述之方法,更包括: 接收在該功率信號上重疊的資料; 將該資料解碼為複數個命令; 選擇該命令中定址第-位址和整體位址之一的命令,其中,該控制參 數包括該第一位址;以及 根據該等命令之一些,以産生該控制信號。 如申請專利範圍第126項所述之方法,更包括: 根據該接W靖織綠行電力雜雜作,其t,該㈣是重設位 址操作、更新位址操作、廣播連接操作、以及傳送位址操作的至少_ 個。 如申請專利範圍第119項所述之方法,更包括: 在接收到該轉魏錢簡第-_進行計時,其巾,雜制參數包括該第-綱’以及其巾,當該第—綱過辦,執機産生該控 制信號。 如申請專利範圍第128項所述之方法,更包括: 在啓動程式規難式後,轉該辨健接通的綱綠定該 間。 如申請專利範圍第128項所述之方法,更包括:當在該第-期間過去之前切斷該功率信號時,縮減該第一期間。 如申請專利範圍第130項所述之方法,更包括: 91 200835882 當在該第一期間過去後的預定時間期間内 通時,增加該第一期間。 ’該功率信號被切斷然後接 132 •如申請專利範圍第128項所述之方法,更包括: 在該第-期間過去之前,當該功率信號在預定時間期間内 通、以及切斷時,縮減該第一期間。 切斷、接 133 •如申請專利範圍第132項所述之方法,更包括: 當在已經執行了該縮減之後的預定時間期間内,該功率信 斷和接通時,增加該第一期間。 口 號接通、切According to the data, the receiver module includes the controllable light fixture of the first address, which is connected to the first item, wherein the 13⁄4, -, carrier receiving module is connected according to the / Cut off the modulation to perform the operation. For example, the controllable luminaires described in the 77th item of the Shen-Year Patent, in which the technology, the technology, the singularity, and the transmission position, such as the control luminaires described in 68 of the patent scope, wherein the receiver module The group further includes a timing module, the timing module counting the 'the towel' after receiving the power signal, the control parameter includes the value, and the towel, when the timing module reaches the predetermined value, the receiver The module generates the control signal. The controllable luminaire of claim 79, wherein the receiver module sets the predetermined value according to a period during which the power signal is turned on after the program planning mode is activated. The controllable luminaire as described in claim 79, wherein the receiving 83 200835882 module reduces the predetermined time even if the power signal is cut off before the timing § module reaches the predetermined value value. 82 83 84 85 86. The controllable luminaire of claim 81, wherein the power signal is turned off and then turned on during a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value, The receiver module increases the predetermined value. • The controllable luminaire of claim 79, wherein when the power signal is turned off, on, and off within a predetermined time period before the timer module reaches the predetermined value, The receiver module reduces the predetermined value. The controllable luminaire of claim 83, wherein the power signal is turned off, on, off, and turned on during a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value, The receiver module increases the predetermined value. • The controllable luminaire of claim 68, wherein the electrical connector comprises a conductive female thread and a conductive contact. • A method comprising: receiving a power signal at a luminaire; monitoring an on/off modulation of the power signal; determining a control parameter according to the on/off modulation; when the power is received, according to Enough to generate (four) signals; provide an output power signal to the bulb; and reduce the output power signal according to the control signal. The method of claim 86, wherein the power signal presence and the power signal are absent during a predetermined time period. 84 87 · 200835882 88. The method of claim 86, wherein The second binary state corresponds to the power signal does not exist. 89. The method of claim 86, wherein the power signal does not exist to receive the second binary state pair: the pre-determined long bit ==: a period shorter than the predetermined length, 90. The method of claim 86, further comprising: planning a startup sequence from the on/off modulation program prior to performing the decision. 91. The method of claim 90, wherein the program programming initiation sequence comprises a predetermined on/off sequence detected during a predetermined time period. 92. The method of claim 86, It further includes: § When receiving the control signal, the output power _ _ _ · Bayer is reduced to the value of the cut-off value and the cut-off value. 93 The method described in claim 86 of the patent scope, including Receiving data overlapping on the power signal; decoding the data into a plurality of commands; and wherein the control parameter selects the number of the command addressing one of the first address and the overall address to include the first address And generating the control signal based on some of the commands. 85 200835882 94·If the scope of the patent application is the first. τ 广 插 插 , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , shooting, test parameters signal. , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , To set the method described in the first paragraph 97, as described in paragraph 95 of the patent, further includes: When in the first-part (four), cut __ oblique, take care of the first period. 98. The method of claim 97, further comprising: increasing the first period when a predetermined time after the elapse of the first period has passed. The force is said to be cut and then 99. The method of claim 95, further comprising: before the passage of the first period, when the power signal is scheduled and cut off, depending on the first period. During the inter-decade period, the in-line 30 is turned on 100. The method as described in claim 99, further includes: 1 cutting, turning on, cutting off, and picking up within a predetermined period of time after the reduction has been performed. The first period is increased by the time.仏86 86 200835882 101 · A controllable light bulb adjuster, comprising: the controllable bulb adjuster - the receiver of the controllable bulb adjuster, which is connected by the first electric power a root-to-signal junction of the transcriptional surface (IV) is selectively controllable == the electronic switch of the whole device, which outputs an output power signal, and the output power signal is reduced according to the control 仏唬And a second electrical connector of the controllable bulb adjuster that accommodates the wheeled recording. 102. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 1, wherein the on/off change comprises a count of one of a power signal presence and a absence of a power signal during a predetermined time period. 103. The controllable light bulb adjuster as claimed in claim </ RTI> </ RTI> wherein the absence of the on/cutting modulation comprises binary data collected during a period of sampling, wherein the first-like position Corresponding to the presence of the power signal, the second binary state corresponds to the power signal 104. The controllable bulb adjuster as described in claim 1 of the patent application, wherein the on/off_change includes the presence of transcription and A period of time that does not exist, - an application, wherein the second and second test rides are shorter than a predetermined length, and the second binary state corresponds to a period longer than the predetermined length. 105. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 1, wherein the receiving Is mode determines the parameter of the 2008 20088882 system after the start/stop modulation command programming start sequence. 106 • The controllable light bulb adjuster as described in claim 105, wherein the program code is included in the silent period _ execution _ fixed on/cut street sequence 107 108 • as claimed in claim 101 The controllable light bulb adjuster is wherein the electronic switch reduces the output power ° signal to about zero when the control signal is received. • If you can control the bulb adjuster as described in item 101 of the patent application, the f中f receives the _信麟, the electronic switch reduces the input (four) rate signal to the down-regulation 109 110 · 111 · as claimed in the patent scope The controllable light bulb adjuster of item 101, wherein the receiver module comprises a power line carrier receiving cassette module, and the power line carrier receiver is connected to the first address via the power ship, and is addressed by the address And a command of the first 'address and the entire address, wherein the control parameter includes the first address, and the receiver module generates the control signal according to the data. A controllable light bulb adjuster as described in claim 109, wherein the power line carrier receiver module performs an operation in accordance with the on/off modulation. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 110, wherein the operation is at least one of a button operation, an update button operation, and a transfer address operation. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 101, wherein the receiver module further comprises a timing module, the timing module starts counting 88 112 · 200835882 after receiving the power signal, wherein the control The parameter includes a predetermined value, and wherein the receiver module generates the control signal when the meter module reaches the predetermined value. 113. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 112, wherein the receiver module sets the predetermined value according to the power signal after the program planning mode is activated. 114. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 112, wherein the sweetener module reduces the predetermined time before the timer module reaches the predetermined value and the power signal is broken. value. 115. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 114, wherein the receiver module is turned off and then turned on during a predetermined time period after the timer module reaches the predetermined value Increase the predetermined value. 116. The controllable light bulb adjuster of claim 1, wherein the power signal is turned off, on, and off during a predetermined time period before the timer module reaches the predetermined value The receiver module reduces the predetermined value. • ^ = a controllable light bulb adjuster as described in claim 116, wherein the timing ϋ module reaches a predetermined value _ timing __, the power signal is turned on, off and on, The receiver module increases the predetermined value. 118. The controllable bubble adjuster according to the scope of the patent, wherein the younger brother includes a conductive male thread and a conductive tip, and wherein the second electrical connector comprises a conductive cathode Thread and conductive contact. 119 · A method comprising: · 89 200835882 120 121 122 · 123 124 receiving a power signal from the luminaire; monitoring the on/off modulation of the power signal; determining the control parameter according to the on/off modulation; When the power signal is turned on, control is generated according to the control parameter to provide an output power signal to the bulb; and the output power signal is reduced according to the control signal. The method of claim 119, wherein the monitoring comprises: counting one of the power cakes that are not present on the drum. The method of claim 119, wherein the monitoring comprises collecting the binary data during the sampling period of the period, wherein the first binary repulsion corresponds to the presence of the complication, and the second binary _ is determined Wei does not exist. The method of claim 119, wherein the monitoring comprises collecting a binary (4) by a period in which the power signal does not exist, wherein the 'secondary record' is short in length. During the period, the first binary state corresponds to a period longer than the predetermined length. For example, the method described in claim 119 of the patent scope further includes: performing the riding of the mosquito secret/___程钱·moving sequence. The method of claim 123, wherein the program planning initiation sequence comprises a limb on/off sequence detected during a predetermined time_. 125 The method of claim 119, further includes: 90 200835882 When receiving the control unicorn, the round self-recognition and the cutoff value of 126 127 · 128 · 129 130 131 The method of claim 119, further comprising: receiving data overlapping on the power signal; decoding the data into a plurality of commands; selecting a command for addressing the first address and the entire address in the command Wherein the control parameter includes the first address; and based on some of the commands to generate the control signal. The method of claim 126, further comprising: according to the connection, the t (4) is a reset address operation, an update address operation, a broadcast connection operation, and Transfer at least _ of the address operations. For example, in the method of claim 119, the method further includes: when receiving the transfer of the money, the first time, the towel, the miscellaneous parameters including the first-class 'and its towel, when the first-class After the operation, the machine generates the control signal. For example, in the method described in claim 128, the method further includes: after starting the program specification, the transition to the green is determined. The method of claim 128, further comprising: reducing the first period when the power signal is turned off before the first period elapses. The method of claim 130, further comprising: 91 200835882 increasing the first period when the predetermined period of time after the expiration of the first period is passed. 'The power signal is cut off and then connected 132. The method of claim 128, further comprising: before the passage of the first period, when the power signal is turned on and off during a predetermined time period, Reduce the first period. The method of claim 132, further comprising: increasing the first period when the power is asserted and turned on within a predetermined time period after the reduction has been performed. The slogan is connected and cut 134 •一種主控制器,包括: 控制模組,其産生餘可控制裝置的控職料’且靖負 耗;以及 千兩 遺失脈衝傳送器,其接收週期功率信號,向該可控制裝置傳送 週期功率信號的輸出功率信號,並且藉由在該週期功率信號的^ 零點之間選雜地縮賴輸出功率錢的信舰幅和功率位準^ 至少一個而在該輸出功率信號中編碼該控制資料。 、 135 如申晴專利範圍第134項所述之主控制器,其中 鲁 該遺失脈衝傳送器包括開關,該開關包括:控制端,其與該控制模組 相連;以及,第一端,其接收該週期功率信號。 、’、 136 · 如申請專利範圍第135項所述之主控制器,其中 該開關包括三端雙向可控矽開關元件。 如申請專利範圍第135項所述之主控制器,其中 該開關在該輸出功率信號中在該過零點之間近似輪出跫功率 92 137 · 200835882 138 ·如申請專利範圍第134項所述之主控制器,更包括: 使用者介面,其包括Μ個輸入,其中,Μ是大於一的整數;以及, 參數控制模組,其儲存與該Μ個輸入對應的Μ個控制參數,其中, 當致動該Μ個輸入之一時,該控制模組依據該Μ個控制參數的對 應的一個來産生該控制資料。 139 ·如申請專利範圍第134項所述之主控制器,更包括: 電力線介面,其接收被重疊在該週期功率信號上的資料,其中,該控 制模組根據來自該電力線介面的資料,而産生該控制資料。 140 ·如申請專利範圍第134項所述之主控制器,更包括: 接收資料的無線介面,其中,該控制模組;^據來自該無線介面的該資 料’而產生該控制資料。 141 ·如申凊專利範圍第134項所述之主控制器,更包括: 接收器’該接收器侧由該可控制裝置消耗的電流,並且將該電流消 耗解碼爲從該可控制裝置接收的資料。134. A main controller, comprising: a control module that generates a control component of the controllable device and a lossy load; and a kilosecond lost pulse transmitter that receives the periodic power signal and transmits the cycle to the controllable device Outputting a power signal of the power signal, and encoding the control data in the output power signal by selectively diminishing at least one of the power of the output power and the power level between the zero points of the periodic power signal . 135. The main controller of claim 134, wherein the lost pulse transmitter comprises a switch, the switch comprising: a control end connected to the control module; and a first end receiving The periodic power signal. , ', 136. The main controller of claim 135, wherein the switch comprises a three-terminal bidirectional controllable switch element. The main controller of claim 135, wherein the switch approximates the power of the enthalpy between the zero crossings in the output power signal. 92 137 · 200835882 138 · as described in claim 134 The main controller further includes: a user interface, including one input, wherein Μ is an integer greater than one; and a parameter control module that stores one control parameter corresponding to the one input, wherein, When one of the inputs is actuated, the control module generates the control data based on a corresponding one of the one of the control parameters. 139. The main controller of claim 134, further comprising: a power line interface that receives data that is superimposed on the periodic power signal, wherein the control module is based on data from the power line interface Generate this control data. 140. The main controller of claim 134, further comprising: a wireless interface for receiving data, wherein the control module generates the control data based on the information from the wireless interface. 141. The main controller of claim 134, further comprising: a receiver's current consumed by the controllable device on the receiver side, and decoding the current consumption as received from the controllable device data. 142 · —種系統,包括如申請專利範圍第134項所述之主控制 括該可控制裝置。 1 器,以及更包 143 ·如申請專利範圍第142項所述之系統,其中 括遺失脈衝接收器’其接收該輸出功率信號,並且 Γ的過零點之_測該輸出功率信號的信號振 制資料-、、至乂個中之縮減來解碼在該輸出功率信號中的控 93 200835882 144 ·如申請專利範圍第143項所述之系統,其中 該可控制裝置更包括: 控制模組,其儲存該控制資料,並且根據該控制資料來產生控制信 號;以及, 開關,其根據該輸出功率信號和該控制信號而調整該負載的負載功率 信號。 145 ·如申請專利範圍第144項所述之系統,其中 該開關包括·控制端’其接收該控制信號;第一^端,其接收該輸出功 率信號。 146 ·如申請專利範圍第144項所述之系統,其中 該開關將該負載功率信號設定為調降值、接通值、以及切斷值之一。 147 ·如申請專利範圍第143項所述之系統,其中 該遺失脈衝接收器將:在該過零點之間的該信號振幅和該功率位準 至少一個與預定值相比較。 ' 148 ·如申請專利範圍第142項所述之系統,其中 該控制模組包括計時模組,其中,該控制資料包括至少一個計护 間,以及其中,該控制信號是依據該至少一個計時期間。 149 ·如申請專利範圍第142項所述之系統,其中 該可控制裝置更包括參數儲存模組,該參數儲存模組與該控制模 連,並且健存P健制對,該控制對中的每一個包括 僮和 時值,其中,P是大於零的整數。 平值和叶 150 ·如申請專利範圍第149項所述之系統,其中 94 200835882 該控制信號依據該p個控制對之一, 有關的該計時舰錢,_該p對中該 m·—種方法,包括: 産生用於可控制裝置的控制資料 接收週期功率信號; ,,制裝置傳送依據該週期功率信號的輸出功率辟 精由^擇性地縮減在該週期功率彳古發&amp; @ 及142. A system comprising the controllable device as described in claim 134 of the patent application. A device according to claim 142, wherein the missing pulse receiver receives the output power signal, and the zero-crossing of the chirp detects the signal of the output power signal. The data-, and the reduction of the data to be decoded in the output power signal. The system of claim 133, wherein the controllable device further comprises: a control module, which stores The control data, and generating a control signal according to the control data; and a switch that adjusts a load power signal of the load according to the output power signal and the control signal. 145. The system of claim 144, wherein the switch comprises a control terminal that receives the control signal and a first terminal that receives the output power signal. 146. The system of claim 144, wherein the switch sets the load power signal to one of a down value, an on value, and a cutoff value. 147. The system of claim 143, wherein the lost pulse receiver: the signal amplitude between the zero crossings and the power level are at least one compared to a predetermined value. The system of claim 142, wherein the control module includes a timing module, wherein the control data includes at least one care room, and wherein the control signal is based on the at least one timing period . 149. The system of claim 142, wherein the controllable device further comprises a parameter storage module, the parameter storage module is coupled to the control module, and the health care system is paired. Each includes a child and a time value, where P is an integer greater than zero. A flat value and a leaf 150. The system of claim 149, wherein 94 200835882 the control signal is based on one of the p control pairs, the relevant time of the ship, _ the p pair of the m. The method comprises: generating a control data receiving cycle power signal for the controllable device; and transmitting, by the device, the output power of the power signal according to the cycle is selectively reduced in the cycle power 彳古发 &amp; @ and 其調節負載的功率消耗,· 的信號振幅和功率位準的的輪出功率信號 該控制資料。 ^個’邮該翻辨信號中編碼 152 ·如申請專利範圍第151項所述之方法,更包括: 在該過零點之間’選擇性地職輪㈣^魏朗近似零功率。 153 ·如申請專利範圍第151項所述之方法,更包括: 儲存與Μ個輸入對應的Μ個控制參數;以及 當該Μ個輸人之-銳鱗,根據⑽健制參數帽應的一個來 產生該控制資料。 154 ·如申請專利範圍第151項所述之方法,更包括: 接收被重疊在該週期功率信號上的資料;以及 依據該重疊資料而産生該控制資料。 155 ·如申請專利範圍第151項所述之方法,更包括: 無線地接收資料;以及 依據該無線接收的資料而産生該控制資料。 156 ·如申請專利範圍第151項所述之方法,更包括: 95 200835882 157 158 159 · 160 · 161 . 偵測由該可控制裝置消耗的電流;以及 將該毛机消耗解碼為從該可控制裝置接收的資料。 •如申請專利範圍第151項所述之方法,更包括: 接收該輸出功率信號;以及 糟由在該輸出功率信號的過零點之間侧該輸出功率信號的㈣虎振 幅和功率鱗的至少—辦縮減,以解碼在該輸出功率信^ 該控制資料。 如申請專利範圍第157項所述之方法,更包括·· 根據該控制資料來産生控制信號;以及 根據該輸出功率信號和該控制信號,而調整用於該負載的負载功率作 號。 σ 如申請專利範圍第158項所述之方法,更包括: 將邊負載功率信號設定為調降值、接通值、以及切斷值之一。 如申請專利範圍第157項所述之方法,更包括: 將在該過令點之間的該彳^號振幅和該功率位準的至少一個、盘^ 相比較。 /、疋值 如申請專利範圍第157項所述之方法,更包括: 根據該控制資料而對至少一個期間進行計時;以及 根據該至少一個期間來產生該控制信號。 如申請專利範圍第157項所述之方法,更包括: 儲存P個控制對,該P個控制對中的每一個包括功率位準值和計 值,其中,p是大於零的整數。 、 96 162 · 200835882 163 •如申請專利範圍第162項所述之方法,更包括: 依據該P個控制對中的一個産生該控制信號;以及 在與該P控制信號中該的一個有關的計時值過去後,依據該p個控制 對中的另一個而産生該控制信號。 164 · —種可控制裝置,包括: 遺失脈衝接收器,其接收第一功率信號,並且藉由在該第一功率信號 的過零點之間偵測該第一功率信號的信號振幅和功率位準的至 個中|f§減’來解碼在該第一功率信號中的控制資料; 控制模組,其儲存該控制資料,並且根據該控制資料而産生控制信 號,·以及, 口 開關’其根據該第一功率信號和該控制信號來調整用於負載的負载功 率信號。 165 ·如申請專利範圍第164項所述之可控制裝置,其中 該開關包括:控制端,其接收該控制信號;第一端,其接收該第一功 率信號。 166 ·如申請專利範圍第164項所述之可控制裝置,其中 該遺失脈衝接收器將在該過零點之間的該信號振幅和該功率位準的 至少一個與預定值相比較。 167 ·如申請專利範圍第164項所述之可控制裝置,其中 該開關將該負载功率信號設定為調降值、接通值、以及切斷值之一。 168 ·如申請專利範圍第164項所述之可控制裝置,其中 該控制模組包括計時模組,其中,該控制資料包括計時期間,該控制 97 200835882 #號是依據該計時期間。 t二:月專,圍第164項所述之可控制裝置’更包括: 鮮數細驗銳鋪觀树,並域存p個控 =’ w她制射的每—她括辨辦值 1 疋大於一的整數。 ,』阻八丫 r no ·如巾請專利細第169項所述之可控制裝置,其中 該P個控制對是依據該控制資料。 1了1如申凊專利範圍帛no項所述之可控制裝置,其中 該P個控制對之一,並且然後在與該p個控制 有關的該物值過去後,依據該p個控制對中的另一個。 172 ·如申請專利細帛⑺項所叙可控制裝置,其中 控锻躲_在解_麵財_ p健鑛中的該至 17Ht!;括如中請專利範圍第164項所述之該可控制裝置,並且 更包括主控制器,該主控制器包括·· 控制模組,其産生用於該可控制裝置的該控制資料.以及 遺失器’其接收職功率信號,向該可控制裝置傳送依據該 率信號的該第-神信號’並且藉由在魏期功率 之間選擇性地_第—功率信號的該錢振幅和該功率 位準的至少—個而在該第—功率信號中編财控制資料。 174 ·如申請專利範圍第173項所述之系統,其中 該遺失脈衝傳送器包括開關,該開關包括:控制端,其與該控繼組 98 200835882 相連;以及,第一端,其接收該週期功率信號。 175 ·如申請專利範圍第174項所述之系統,其中 該開關包括三端雙向可控矽開關元件。 176 •如申請專利範圍第174項所述之系統,其中 該開關在該過零點之間在該第一功率信號中輸出近似零功率。 177 ·如申請專利範圍第173項所述之系統,其中 • 該主控制器更包括: 使用者介面,其包括Μ個輸入,其中,M是大於一的整數;以及 參數控制模組,其儲存與該Μ個輸入對應的M個控制參數’,其中, 啓動該Μ個輸入之一時,該控制模組依據該%個控制參數中 應的一個來産生該控制資料。 〆 、 178 ·如申請專利範圍第173項所述之系統,其中 該主控制H更包括電力線介面,該電力線介面接收被重疊在該週期功 率信號上的資料,其中,該控制模組根據來自該電力線介面的該資 φ 料,而産生該控制資料。 、 179 ·如申請專利範圍第173項所述之系統,其中 該主控制益更包括接收資料的無線介面,其中,該控制模組根據來自 該無線介面的該資料而産生該控制資料。 180 •如申請專利範圍第173項所述之系統,其中 該主控制為更包括接收器,其债測由該可控制裝置消耗的電流,並且 將該電流消耗解碼為來自該可控制裝置的用於該主控制器的資料。 99 200835882 181 •一種方法,包括: 接收第一功率信號; 藉由在該第-功率信號的過零點之間偵測該第一功率信號的信據振 幅和功率位準的至少一個中縮減來解碼在該第一功率信號中的 控制資料; 根據該控制資料而產生控制信號,·以及 根據該第-神㈣和該控制信號,來調整用於負載的負載功率信 號0 182 如申請專利範圍第181項所述之方法,更包括: 將在該過零點之間的該信號振幅和該功率位準的至少一個與預定值 相比較。It regulates the power consumption of the load, the signal amplitude and the power level of the wheeled power signal. ^ </ br> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> <RTIgt; 153. The method of claim 151, further comprising: storing a plurality of control parameters corresponding to one input; and when the one of the input is a sharp scale, according to (10) a parameter of the health parameter cap To generate this control data. 154. The method of claim 151, further comprising: receiving data that is superimposed on the periodic power signal; and generating the control data based on the overlapping data. 155. The method of claim 151, further comprising: receiving data wirelessly; and generating the control data based on the wirelessly received data. 156. The method of claim 151, further comprising: 95 200835882 157 158 159 · 160 · 161 . detecting current consumed by the controllable device; and decoding the gross machine consumption from the controllable Information received by the device. • The method of claim 151, further comprising: receiving the output power signal; and causing at least one of the (4) tiger amplitude and the power scale of the output power signal between the zero crossings of the output power signal. Do a reduction to decode the control data in the output power signal ^. The method of claim 157, further comprising: generating a control signal based on the control data; and adjusting a load power factor for the load based on the output power signal and the control signal. σ. The method of claim 158, further comprising: setting the side load power signal to one of a down value, an on value, and a cut value. The method of claim 157, further comprising: comparing the amplitude of the signal between the command points and at least one of the power levels. The method of claim 157, further comprising: timing the at least one period based on the control data; and generating the control signal based on the at least one period. The method of claim 157, further comprising: storing P control pairs, each of the P control pairs including a power level value and a value, wherein p is an integer greater than zero. 96 162 · 200835882 163. The method of claim 162, further comprising: generating the control signal based on one of the P control pairs; and timing associated with the one of the P control signals After the value has passed, the control signal is generated based on the other of the p control pairs. 164. A controllable device, comprising: a lost pulse receiver that receives a first power signal and detects a signal amplitude and a power level of the first power signal between zero crossings of the first power signal The control data is stored in the first power signal; the control module stores the control data, and generates a control signal according to the control data, and the port switch The first power signal and the control signal adjust a load power signal for the load. 165. The controllable device of claim 164, wherein the switch comprises: a control terminal that receives the control signal; and a first terminal that receives the first power signal. 166. The controllable device of claim 164, wherein the lost pulse receiver compares the signal amplitude between the zero crossings and at least one of the power levels to a predetermined value. 167. The controllable device of claim 164, wherein the switch sets the load power signal to one of a down value, an on value, and a cutoff value. 168. The controllable device of claim 164, wherein the control module comprises a timing module, wherein the control data comprises a timing period, and the control 97 200835882 # is based on the timing period. t 2: The monthly special, the controllable device mentioned in Item 164' includes: The fresh number is carefully examined and the tree is stored, and the domain is stored with p control = 'W each of her shots - she includes the value 1疋 an integer greater than one. </ br> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> <RTIgt; 1 a controllable device as described in the scope of claim ,no, wherein one of the P control pairs, and then after the object value associated with the p controls, is based on the p control pairs Another one. 172 · As described in the patent application (7), the control device can be controlled, in which the control is forged to _ in the solution _ _ _ _ p _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ a control device, and further comprising a main controller, comprising: a control module that generates the control data for the controllable device. And the missing device 'receives a job power signal to which the control device transmits And according to the first-signal signal of the rate signal, and in the first power signal by selectively controlling the money amplitude of the _th power signal and at least one of the power levels between the powers of the Wei period Financial control information. 174. The system of claim 173, wherein the lost pulse transmitter comprises a switch, the switch comprising: a control end coupled to the control group 98 200835882; and a first end receiving the cycle Power signal. 175. The system of claim 174, wherein the switch comprises a three-terminal bidirectionally controllable switch element. 176. The system of claim 174, wherein the switch outputs approximately zero power in the first power signal between the zero crossings. 177. The system of claim 173, wherein: the main controller further comprises: a user interface comprising: one input, wherein M is an integer greater than one; and a parameter control module storing The M control parameters corresponding to the one input, wherein, when one of the inputs is activated, the control module generates the control data according to one of the % control parameters. The system of claim 173, wherein the main control H further comprises a power line interface, the power line interface receiving data superimposed on the periodic power signal, wherein the control module is based on the The control information is generated by the resource of the power line interface. 179. The system of claim 173, wherein the main control benefit comprises a wireless interface for receiving data, wherein the control module generates the control data based on the data from the wireless interface. 180. The system of claim 173, wherein the main control further comprises a receiver that measures the current consumed by the controllable device and decodes the current consumption as being from the controllable device Information on the main controller. 99 200835882 181 - A method comprising: receiving a first power signal; decoding by detecting at least one of a signal amplitude and a power level of the first power signal between zero crossings of the first power signal a control data in the first power signal; generating a control signal according to the control data, and adjusting a load power signal for the load according to the first god (four) and the control signal, as in claim 181 The method of the present invention, further comprising: comparing at least one of the signal amplitude and the power level between the zero crossings with a predetermined value. 183 如申請專利範圍第181項所述之方法,更包括: 將該負載辨信號設定為調降值、接通值、以及切斷值之一。 184 185 如申請專利範圍第181項所述之方法,更包括: 根據該控制資料而對至少一個期間進行計時;以及 根據該至少一個期間而産生該控制信號。 如申請專利範圍第181項所述之方法,更包括: 儲存P健鑛,該P健觸中聽-個包括辨位準值和 值,其中,P是大於一的整數。 計時 186 187 如申請專利範圍第185項所述之方法,其中 該P個控制對是依據該控制資料。 如申請專利範圍第185項所述之方法,更包括: 100 200835882 根據該p個控制對之一來産生該控制信號;以及 在與該p控制對中該有關的計時值過去後,依據該P個控制對中的另 一個而産生該控制信號。 188 ·如申請專利範圍第187項所述之方法,更包括: 根據該控制資料來選擇在該參數儲存模組中的該p個控制對中該的那 一個0 189 ·如申請專利範圍第181項所述之方法,更包括: Φ 接收週期功率信號; 傳送依據該週期功率信號的該第一功率信號;以及 猎由在該週期神信號的過零點之嶋擇性地賴該第—功率信號 的該信號振幅和該功率位準的至少一個,而在該第一功率信號中 編碼該控制資料。 〜 190 ·如申請專利範圍第189項所述之方法,更包括: 在該過零點之間將該第一功率信號縮減到近似零功率。 191183. The method of claim 181, further comprising: setting the load identification signal to one of a down value, an on value, and a cut value. 184 185 The method of claim 181, further comprising: timing the at least one period based on the control data; and generating the control signal based on the at least one period. The method of claim 181, further comprising: storing a P-mine, wherein the P-sense includes a value and a value, wherein P is an integer greater than one. Timing 186 187 The method of claim 185, wherein the P control pairs are based on the control data. The method of claim 185, further comprising: 100 200835882 generating the control signal according to one of the p control pairs; and after the timing value associated with the p control pair has passed, according to the P The control signal is generated by the other of the control pairs. 188. The method of claim 187, further comprising: selecting, according to the control data, the one of the p control pairs in the parameter storage module. The method of the present invention further includes: Φ receiving a periodic power signal; transmitting the first power signal according to the periodic power signal; and selectively selecting the first power signal by a zero crossing of the god signal during the period The signal amplitude and at least one of the power levels are encoded in the first power signal. 190. The method of claim 189, further comprising: reducing the first power signal to approximately zero power between the zero crossings. 191 的一個來産 如申請專利範圍第189項所述之方法,更包括: 儲存與Μ個輪入對應的μ個控制參數;以及 當致動該Μ錄人之_時,依據該Μ健制參數 生該控制資料。 192 ·如申請專利範圍第189項所述之方法,更包括: 接收被重疊在該週期功率信號上的資料;以及 根據該重疊資料産生該控制資料。 193 ·如申請專利範圍第189項所述之方法,更包括: 101 200835882 無線地接收資料;以及 根據該無線接收的資料而產生該控制資料。 194 195 196 · 197 · 198 · •如申請專利範圍第189項所述之方法,更包括: 摘測由該可控制裝置消耗的電流,·以及 將該電流絲解碼為從财控繼置接收的資料。 ——種安裝程式規劃器,包括·· 控置的奴賴轉,射觸裝置調 2?: 2 規劃資料包括計時值和功率位準值的 逍失脈衝傳心,其接收獅功率健,向該可蝴裝置傳送依據該 ,期功率信號的輸出功率信號,並且藉由在該棚神信號的= 令點之間選雜地縮減輸㈣率健驗幅和辨位準的至 少一個,而在該輸出功率信號中編碼該程式規劃資料。 如申请專利範圍第195項所述之安裝程式規劃器,其中 該遺失脈衝傳送H包括開關’該開關包括:控綱,其無控制模組 相連;以及第一端,其接收該週期功率信號。 如申請專利範圍第196項所述之安裝程式規劃器,其中 該開關包括三端雙向可控矽開關元件。 如申請專利範圍第196項所述之安裝程式規劃器,其中 該開關在該過零點之間在該輸出功率信號中輸出近似零功率。 如申請專利範圍第195項所述之安裝程式規劃器,更包括: 使用者介面’包括Μ個輸入,其中,μ是大於一的整數;以及, 102 199 200835882 參數控麵組,無存絲M働讀觸M姉絲齡數,其 ^當致動該Μ個輸入之一時,該控麵組依據該M個程式規劃參 數中對應的一個來産生該程式規劃資料。 200 ·如申請專利範圍第195項所述之安裝程式規劃器,更包括: 接收器,該接收器細由該可控制裝置消耗的電流,並且蔣該電流消 耗解碼為從該可控制裝置接收的資料。 201 ·如申請專利範圍第200項所述之安裝程式規劃器,更包括: Nf發丨生記L® S巾’該控冑樓組在該非揮發性記憶體巾儲存從該 I控制裝置接㈣職料,並且根據在該非揮發性記憶體中儲存的該 資料而選擇性地産生該程式規劃資料。 202 ·如申請專利範圍第195項所述之安裝程式規劃器,其中 該程式規劃資料包括計時值和功率位準值的至少一對。 種系統包括如申凊專利範圍第⑼項所述之該安裝程式規劃哭, 並且更包括該可控制裝置。 一 W 204 ·如申請專利範圍第2〇3項所述之系統,其中 該可?制裝置更包括遺失脈衝接收器,該遺失脈衝接收器接收該輪出 功率信號,並且藉由在該輸出轉信號的過零點之間細該輸出功率 信號的該信號振幅和該功率位準的至少一個中縮減,來解碼在該輸出 功率信號中的該程式規劃資料。 2〇5 ·如申請專利範圍第2〇4項所述之系統,其中 該可控制裝置更包括: 控制核組,其贿該减酬資料,根據雜式規難料來産生控 103 200835882 206 207 208 209 · 210 · 制貧料’並且根據該控制資料而産生控制信號;以及, 開關,其根據該輸出功率信號和該控制信號而調整用於該負載的負 載功率信號。 ' •如申請專利範圍第205項所述之系統,其中 該開關包括:控制端,其接收該控制信號;第一端,其接收該輸出功 率信號。 •如申請專利範圍第205項所述之系統,其中 該開關將該負載功率信號調整為調降值、接通值、以及切斷值之一。 .如申請專利範圍第204項所述之系統,其中 該m失脈衝魏H將在該過零點之間的健雜幅與預定信 相比較。 細 如申請專利範圍第204項所述之系統,其中 =幸失脈_收||將在觸零點之_該神辦無定功率位準 如申請專利範圍第203項所述之系統,其中 該控讎組包括計時歡,其中,該程式賴龍包括至少—個 期間,其中,該控制信號是依據該至少一個計時期間的。 守 如申請專利範圍第203項所述之系統,其中 邊可控制裝置更包括參_存模組,财數贿模域制模 連’並且儲存Ρ個控騎’該ρ個控辦中的每—個包括功率位準枯 和計時值,其中,Ρ是大於零的整數。 值 104 211 · 200835882 212 213 214 · 215 · 216 · =請專利範圍第2„項所述之系统, 該控制信號依據該P個控制對 八 的計時值過錢,職—㈣中該有關 一種方法,包括: 接㈣期料包括計時值和功率位準值的至少一個; 藉 的信號振幅和功率位準的至少 該程式規劃資料 顧胸率信號的獅功率信號;以及 Γ…率^#u的過零點之㈣擇性地賴該輸出功率信號 •個,而在該輸出功率信號中編碼 如申明專利範圍弟213項所述之方法,更包括: 在該過令點之騎該輸出辨信號縮酬近似零功率。 如申請專利範圍第213項所述之方法,更包括: 儲存與Μ個輸入對應的M個控制參數;以及 M ’轉該M健制參數帽躺一個,來 産生該程式規劃資料。 如申睛專利範圍第213項所述之方法,更包括: 谓測由該可控制裝置消耗的電流;以及 將該電流消耗解碼為從該可控制裝置接收的資料。 如申睛專利範圍第216項所述之方法,更包括: 在該非揮發性記憶體中儲存從該可控制裝置接收的該資料;以及 根據從該可控制裝置接收的該資料,而選擇性地産生該程式規劃資 105 217 · 200835882 218 219 •如申請專利範圍第213項所述之方法,其中 該程式規婦料包括計雜和功率鱗值較少一對。 如申請專利範圍第213項所述之方法,更包括 接收該輸出功率信號;以及 藉魏的轉狀職繼細飾信顏該信號 的“二劃ίΐ的至少一個中縮減來解褐在該輸出功率信號中 220 如申請專利範圍第219項所述之方法,更包括: 根據該程式規劃資料來産生控制資料; 根據該控制資料而産生控制信號,·以及 根^該_神錄和雜制域·整祕該貞_貞載功率信 221 · 222 · 如申請專利範圍第220項所述之方法,更包括: 將該負載功率信麵整為調降值、接通值、以及峨值之一。 如申請專利範圍第220項所述之方法,更包括: 根據該控制資料而對至少一個期間進行計時;以及 根據該至少一個期間而産生該控制信號。 如申請專利範圍第219項所述之方法,更包括: 將在該過零點之間的該信號振幅和該功率位準的至少一個、與預 相比較。 106 223 · 200835882 224 ·如申請專利範圍第219項所述之方法,更包括. 儲存P健騎,該P健制對幅每—個包括 值,其中,P是大於零的整數。 準值和計時 225 ·如申請專利範圍第224項所述之方法,更包括: 依據該P個控制對之一産生該控制信號;以及 v 在與該P控制對中該有關的計時值過去後,依據該p個控制對中的另 一個,而産生該控制信號。 107A method as described in claim 189, further comprising: storing μ control parameters corresponding to one round entry; and when actuating the record, according to the health parameter The control information was born. 192. The method of claim 189, further comprising: receiving data that is superimposed on the periodic power signal; and generating the control data based on the overlapping data. 193. The method of claim 189, further comprising: 101 200835882 wirelessly receiving data; and generating the control data based on the wirelessly received data. 194 195 196 · 197 · 198 · • The method of claim 189, further comprising: extracting the current consumed by the controllable device, and decoding the current filament to be received from the financial control relay data. - Installer planner, including · Controlled slaves, touch device 2?: 2 Planning data including timing and power level loss pulse heart, receiving lion power, to The butterfly device transmits an output power signal according to the period power signal, and by selectively reducing at least one of the transmission rate and the discrimination level between the = point of the sacred signal The program planning data is encoded in the output power signal. The installer planner of claim 195, wherein the lost pulse transmission H comprises a switch, the switch comprising: a control unit having no control module connected thereto; and a first end receiving the periodic power signal. The installer planner of claim 196, wherein the switch comprises a three-terminal bidirectional controllable switch element. The installer planner of claim 196, wherein the switch outputs approximately zero power in the output power signal between the zero crossings. The installer planner as described in claim 195 of the patent application, further comprising: the user interface 'including one input, wherein μ is an integer greater than one; and, 102 199 200835882 parameter control surface group, no memory M働After reading the M姊 silk age number, when the one of the inputs is actuated, the control panel generates the program planning data according to a corresponding one of the M programming parameters. 200. The installer planner of claim 195, further comprising: a receiver that finely sinks current consumed by the controllable device, and wherein the current consumption is decoded to be received from the controllable device data. 201. The installation program planner as described in claim 200, further comprising: Nf hairpin L® S towel 'the control group in the non-volatile memory towel storage from the I control device (4) The program material is selectively generated based on the data stored in the non-volatile memory. 202. The installer planner of claim 195, wherein the program plan data comprises at least one of a timing value and a power level value. The system includes the installation program planning crying as described in claim (9) of the claim, and further includes the controllable device. A W 204 · The system described in claim 2, item 3, where is it? The device further includes a lost pulse receiver that receives the round-robin power signal and at least the signal amplitude of the output power signal and at least the power level between the zero-crossing points of the output turn signal One is reduced to decode the program plan data in the output power signal. 2〇5 · The system of claim 2, wherein the controllable device further comprises: a control core group, which bribes the fee reduction information, and generates control according to the miscellaneous rules 103 200835882 206 207 208 209 · 210 · a lean material 'and generates a control signal based on the control data; and a switch that adjusts a load power signal for the load based on the output power signal and the control signal. The system of claim 205, wherein the switch comprises: a control terminal that receives the control signal; and a first terminal that receives the output power signal. • The system of claim 205, wherein the switch adjusts the load power signal to one of a down value, an on value, and a cutoff value. The system of claim 204, wherein the m-loss pulse Wei H compares the robustness between the zero crossings with a predetermined signal. As detailed in the system described in claim 204, wherein = the lost pulse _ _ | | will be at the touch point _ the god does not determine the power level as claimed in the patent scope 203, wherein The control group includes a chronograph, wherein the program includes at least one period, wherein the control signal is based on the at least one timing period. The system described in claim 203, wherein the side control device further includes a reference module, and the financial model is connected to the model and stores a control ride. One includes power level dead and timing values, where Ρ is an integer greater than zero. Value 104 211 · 200835882 212 213 214 · 215 · 216 · = Please refer to the system described in item 2 of the patent scope, the control signal is based on the timing value of the P control pairs, and the relevant method is used in (4) And including: the (four) period includes at least one of a timing value and a power level value; the signal amplitude and the power level of the at least the program planning data of the chest power signal of the chest rate signal; and the Γ... rate ^#u The zero-crossing point (4) selectively depends on the output power signal, and encodes the method in the output power signal as described in claim 213 of the patent scope, and further includes: arranging the output signal at the command point The method of claim 301, further includes: storing M control parameters corresponding to one input; and M 'turning the M health parameter cap to lie to generate the program plan The method of claim 213, further comprising: predicating current consumed by the controllable device; and decoding the current consumption to be received from the controllable device The method of claim 216, further comprising: storing the data received from the controllable device in the non-volatile memory; and selecting according to the data received from the controllable device The method of claim </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> </ RTI> <RTIgt; The method of the present invention further includes receiving the output power signal; and deriving at least one of the two strokes of the signal by Wei's transposition to refine the signal in the output power signal 220. The method of claim 219 further includes: generating control data according to the program planning data; generating a control signal according to the control data, and rooting the _magic and miscellaneous domain The load power signal 221 · 222 · The method of claim 220, further comprising: dividing the load power signal into one of a down value, an on value, and a threshold value. The method of claim 220, further comprising: timing the at least one period based on the control data; and generating the control signal based on the at least one period. The method of claim 219, further comprising: comparing the amplitude of the signal between the zero crossings and at least one of the power levels to a pre-comparison. 106 223 · 200835882 224. The method of claim 219, further comprising: storing a P-ride, the P-pairs comprising values, wherein P is an integer greater than zero. Quasi-value and timing 225. The method of claim 224, further comprising: generating the control signal according to one of the P control pairs; and v after the timing value associated with the P control pair has passed And generating the control signal according to the other of the p control pairs. 107
TW096149439A 2006-12-22 2007-12-21 Power control device TWI435995B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US87148306P 2006-12-22 2006-12-22
US82275706A 2006-12-29 2006-12-29
US89033707P 2007-02-16 2007-02-16
US93855007P 2007-05-17 2007-05-17

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW200835882A true TW200835882A (en) 2008-09-01
TWI435995B TWI435995B (en) 2014-05-01

Family

ID=44819807

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW096149439A TWI435995B (en) 2006-12-22 2007-12-21 Power control device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI435995B (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103857146A (en) * 2012-12-06 2014-06-11 索玉升 Illumination regulation and control method and device
TWI450636B (en) * 2011-10-26 2014-08-21 Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd Luminance adjusting circuit of led
TWI452226B (en) * 2009-11-30 2014-09-11 Tridonic Jennersdorf Gmbh Retrofit led lamp with warm white, in particular flame-like white light
TWI454633B (en) * 2011-09-29 2014-10-01 Lite On Electronics Guangzhou Wireless intelligent lamp control method and system, wall switch base and remote switch handset
TWI463916B (en) * 2011-06-20 2014-12-01 Jong Min Deng Control device for controlling brightness of a light source
TWI495397B (en) * 2013-08-01 2015-08-01 Fong-Min Chang Lighting Control Method and Device
TWI566494B (en) * 2015-01-09 2017-01-11 Hep Tech Co Ltd Electrical control system

Cited By (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI452226B (en) * 2009-11-30 2014-09-11 Tridonic Jennersdorf Gmbh Retrofit led lamp with warm white, in particular flame-like white light
TWI463916B (en) * 2011-06-20 2014-12-01 Jong Min Deng Control device for controlling brightness of a light source
TWI454633B (en) * 2011-09-29 2014-10-01 Lite On Electronics Guangzhou Wireless intelligent lamp control method and system, wall switch base and remote switch handset
TWI450636B (en) * 2011-10-26 2014-08-21 Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd Luminance adjusting circuit of led
CN103857146A (en) * 2012-12-06 2014-06-11 索玉升 Illumination regulation and control method and device
TWI486736B (en) * 2012-12-06 2015-06-01 Yu Sheng So Method and equipment for configuring lighting
CN103857146B (en) * 2012-12-06 2016-04-27 索玉升 Illumination regulation and control method and device
TWI495397B (en) * 2013-08-01 2015-08-01 Fong-Min Chang Lighting Control Method and Device
TWI566494B (en) * 2015-01-09 2017-01-11 Hep Tech Co Ltd Electrical control system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TWI435995B (en) 2014-05-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TW200835882A (en) Power control device
US10123398B2 (en) Intelligent lighting control multi-switch apparatuses, systems, and methods
US8570160B2 (en) Methods and systems for controlling devices via power lines
US20190182935A1 (en) Intelligent lighting control light synchronization apparatuses, systems, and methods
US11445592B2 (en) Intelligent lighting control power measurement apparatuses, systems, and methods
US8164428B2 (en) Power control device
CN102948256B (en) There is the energy-saving LED of dimmed function and mood-Lighting control function
CN104868326A (en) Smart socket system for monitoring and controlling load electric appliances and control method thereof
TW200810610A (en) Method and device for driving an array of light sources
CN105786259A (en) Touch panel enabling users to perform self-defining of keys
TW200952553A (en) Line synchronized electrical device and controlling method thereof
CN108401327A (en) Method for controlling lamp and device
JP2016514342A (en) Method and apparatus for automatically controlling status indicator lamp of terminal device
WO2014147065A1 (en) A driver for a light source
JP2013169104A (en) Communication equipment, household electric appliance, controller, communication system, household electric appliance control method, power consumption control method, and program
CN108534188A (en) Intelligent stove and intelligent kitchen tools system
WO2016081982A1 (en) Energy demand monitoring methods and systems
WO2008079399A2 (en) Power control device
US20040251848A1 (en) Electronic switch for lighting lamp that has security function
JP2009074965A (en) Energy consumption reduction support device
JP2013201864A (en) Communication apparatus and home appliance control method and program
CN107801279A (en) Online free establishing method and the anti-lamp of LED guarantors and its control device with it
CN206543044U (en) Shoe chest
CN215499684U (en) Double-control lamp with wireless remote control switch and human body induction device
TWI315164B (en)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees